Revit MEP 2010

Metric Tutorial

March 2009

©

2009 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Disclaimer THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Web Format, Discreet, DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG Extreme, DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, Ecotect, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, Face Robot, FBX, Filmbox, Fire, Flame, Flint, FMDesktop, Freewheel, Frost, GDX Driver, Gmax, Green Building Studio, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HumanIK, IDEA Server, i-drop, ImageModeler, iMOUT, Incinerator, Inferno, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), Kynapse, Kynogon, LandXplorer, LocationLogic, Lustre, Matchmover, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, Moonbox, MotionBuilder, Movimento, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, RasterDWG, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, REALVIZ, Recognize, Render Queue, Retimer,Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, Smoke, Softimage, Softimage|XSI (design/logo), SteeringWheels, Stitcher, Stone, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, TrustedDWG, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Landscape, Visual Survey, Visual Toolbox, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Vtour, Wire, Wiretap, WiretapCentral, XSI, and XSI (design/logo). The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner,Multi-Master Editing, River, and Sparks. The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of MoldflowCorp. in the USA and/or other countries: Moldflow, MPA, MPA (design/logo),Moldflow Plastics Advisers, MPI, MPI (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Insight,MPX, MPX (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Xpert. Third Party Software Program Credits ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002). Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved. ETABS is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc. ETABS © copyright 1984-2005 Computers and Structures, Inc. All rights reserved. RISA is a trademark of RISA Technologies. RISA-3D copyright © 1993-2005 RISA Technologies. All rights reserved.

Portions relating to JPEG © Copyright 1991-1998 Thomas G. Lane. All rights reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Portions relating to TIFF © Copyright 1997-1998 Sam Leffler. © Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. The Tiff portions of this software are provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the copyright owner or contributors of the TIFF portions be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of the TIFF portions of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Portions of Libtiff 3.5.7 Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler. Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics. Portions of Libxml2 2.6.4 Copyright © 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notices and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. Government Use Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
What is in the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Chapter 2

Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Understanding the Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Using the Revit MEP User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Parts of the Revit Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Modifying the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Performing Common Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Chapter 3

Getting Started with MEP Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Creating an MEP Project . . . . . . . . . . Linking Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying a View Template . Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . Modifying General System Options . Specifying File Locations . . . . . . Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 . 30 . 34 . 35 . 35 . 36 . 39 . 40

Creating a Mechanical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Preparing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Placing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Placing a Space in an Open Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

v

Placing a Multi-Level Space . . . . . . . Viewing Zones in the System Browser . . Creating Zones on a Single Level . . . . Creating Zones on Multiple Levels . . . Working with the Analytical Model . . . Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads . Creating a Zone Color Scheme . . . . . Creating an Airflow Schedule . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. 56 . 60 . 61 . 63 . 65 . 69 . 72 . 75

Chapter 5

Designing Mechanical Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Placing Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems . . . . . . . . . Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems . Manually Creating Ductwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 . . 85 . . 92 . . 94 . 101

Chapter 6

Designing a Mechanical Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Adding Mechanical Equipment . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout . . Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout . Adding Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . Sizing Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspecting the System . . . . . . . Checking Piping Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 . 114 . 118 . 127 . 144 . 148 . 151 . 153

Creating an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Specifying Electrical Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Defining Required Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Creating Color Fills and Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Chapter 8

Designing an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills . Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures . . . . . . . . . Placing Switches, Junction Boxes, and Receptacles . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Switch System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Power Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Panel Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking Your Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 . 181 . 183 . 192 . 200 . 204 . 207 . 211 . 213 . 213

Creating a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Chapter 10

Designing a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Creating a Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

vi | Contents

Refining the Sanitary Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Creating the Cold Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Creating the Hot Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Creating a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Specifying Pipe Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Determining Zone Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Chapter 12

Designing a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Adding Sprinklers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . Completing the Fire Protection Wet System . Adding Vertical Supply Piping . . . . . . . . Modifying Pipe Diameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 . 283 . 289 . 293 . 298

Documenting a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . Creating Dependent Views . . . . . . Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 . 308 . 311 . 316

Chapter 14

Working with Annotations and Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Creating Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 Creating a Legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331

Chapter 15

Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail . Creating Detail Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail . . . . . . . . Drafting Detail Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 . 341 . 349 . 353

Contents | vii

viii .

you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to access the tutorial training files. You also learn how to use the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 user interface to perform common tasks.Introduction In this tutorial. you learn how to create and set up an MEP project. Finally. 1 .

2 .

3 . This building is also used as the model in the Revit® Architecture and Revit® Structure 2010 tutorials. electrical panels. and plumbing fixtures. The technical training facility you design was a product of a design competition in Munich. How the tutorials are organized The tutorials are designed to follow the typical mechanical. Expand a title for a list of lessons in the tutorial. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit MEP. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit MEP. What is in the Tutorials In these tutorials. Expand a lesson title for a list of exercises in the lesson. You complete the following phases of design: ■ ■ ■ Import the architectural floor plan in either a 2D (DWG) or a 3D (RVT) format. such as duct. and plumbing engineering workflows. Germany. including an overview of the building information model that you design in the tutorials. The Contents tab of the Revit MEP Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. Add more detailed modelling elements.Using the Tutorials 1 This lesson provides information on how to get started with the Revit® MEP 2010 tutorials. and piping. Add basic MEP elements. electrical. such as mechanical equipment. fixtures. you learn how to design a building information model (BIM) in Revit MEP. and where to find the training files required to complete the exercises.

Each training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. views. For example. your Training folder may be in a different location. In this exercise. Imperial file names have an _i suffix. such as templates and families. it is recommended that you begin each exercise by opening the training provided. 4 | Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . After completing each exercise. When you open a training file. Use the training files A training file is a Revit MEP project that defines a building information model and views of the model that are used to complete the steps in a tutorial. NOTE Depending on your installation. and sheets to document the project. These elements enhance the exercises you complete. When you install the training files as instructed. Create detail views. Locate the training files The Tutorials option on the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 Help menu provides a link to the installation website for the tutorial content and training files. as well as how to open and save them. to provide a richer and more finished design.■ ■ ■ Analyze systems and refine MEP elements. you can choose to save your work. Training files are grouped into 2 folders within the Training folder: ■ ■ Imperial: files for users working with imperial units. Metric file names have an _m suffix. all content used in the tutorials is installed in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files. Create schedules. and tags. For example. Open a training file 1 Click ➤ Open. they are copied to the default location C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2010\Training. So. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system. However. you can complete any exercise without first completing the preceding exercises. you learn where the training files are located. the exercises and lessons can be completed in any order. IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials. however. when you add ductwork. The training files include a starting point for each tutorial exercise. annotations. the tutorials are grouped and presented in a recommended order for optimal learning. Contact your CAD manager for more information. You do not design entire systems. On the Contents tab. but only enough of a system to learn how to use the tools and options in the product. you only draw the duct in one wing of the building. Accessing Training Files Training files are Revit MEP projects. and families that were created specifically for use with the tutorials. templates. The tutorials include a Training File section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. The tutorial exercises are designed to be basic and brief. is located and accessed in the training files location. elements such as additional ductwork and equipment are incorporated into subsequent training files. Metric: files for users working with metric units. you may notice that MEP elements are included that were not specifically added in an exercise.

8 If you have made changes. and click the Training Files icon. and click Save. A good practice is to save the training file with a unique name after you have made changes. scroll down. a list of file types displays. If you click the arrow to the right of the Open option. double-click Imperial or Metric. select the folder in which to save the new file. and click Open. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog: ■ For Save in. you are prompted to save the changes. if you open settings. ■ ■ Close a training file 7 Click ➤ Close. For File name. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. verify that Project Files (*. Click a file type to display the Open dialog for the specified file type. NOTE You are not required to save your work in a training file. 4 Click the training file name. you should save this file with a new name such as settings_modified. the Open dialog displays. For Files of type.rvt) is selected. A training file is provided as a starting point for each exercise. click ➤ Save As. Save a training file 5 To save a training file with a new name. and you can open any supported file type. You may close the file with or without saving changes.rvt and make changes. enter the new file name. 3 In the right pane. For example. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. depending on the instructions in the tutorial.NOTE If you click the word Open in the menu. Accessing Training Files | 5 .rvt.

6 .

the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. the hierarchy of elements. sections. The Revit MEP parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views.Understanding the Basics 2 In this lesson. Understanding the Concepts What is Autodesk Revit MEP 2010? The Revit MEP platform for building information modelling is a design and documentation system that supports the design. and schedules required for a building project. You learn the terminology. drawings. drawing sheets. the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. ■ ■ 7 . If you move the partition. schedules. scope. In the Revit MEP model. the floor or roof remains connected. the operation of the software is parametric. quantities. In mathematics and mechanical CAD. and phases when you need it. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. you learn what Revit MEP is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. and how to perform some common tasks in the product. the door retains this relationship to the partition. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. 2D and 3D view. hence. The following are examples of these element relationships: ■ The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters. In this case. You begin with the fundamental concepts on which Revit MEP is built. As you work in drawing and schedule views. In this case. What is meant by parametric? The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the design that enable the coordination and change management that Revit MEP provides. Building information modelling (BIM) delivers information about project design. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved. and Revit MEP coordinates that change through the entire project. Revit MEP collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. If the length of the elevation is changed. and plans. every drawing sheet. and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. the parameter is one of association or connection. This capability delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit MEP: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project.

The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. They help to describe or document the design. filled regions. For example. tags. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. View-specific elements display only in the views in which they are placed. ■ 8 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . levels. Datum elements help to define project context. ■ There are 2 types of view-specific elements: ■ Annotation elements are 2D components that document the model and maintain scale on paper. and 2D detail components. Examples include detail lines. dimensions. For example. grids. ducts. dimensions. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do. Revit MEP uses 3 types of elements: ■ Model elements represent the actual 3D geometry of the building. Element behavior in a parametric modeler In projects. walls and ceilings are hosts. For example.How does Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 keep things updated? A fundamental characteristic of a building information modelling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. Model components are all the other types of elements in the building model. When you change something. and electrical panels. For example. and reference planes are datum elements. Details are 2D items that provide details about the building model in a particular view. sinks. boilers. For example. sprinklers. boilers. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. They display in relevant views of the design. ■ ■ There are 2 types of model elements: ■ Hosts (or host elements) are generally built in place at the construction site. and keynotes are annotation elements. tags. Revit MEP immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. For example. Revit MEP uses 2 key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design. ducts. sinks. and 2D detail components are view-specific elements. and electrical panels. sprinklers.

the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the structure. you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a structure. elevation views. you can explicitly control them. by locking a dimension or aligning to walls. and so forth). Revit MEP elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly. In other cases. Category: A category is a group of elements that you use to model or document a building design. Understanding the Concepts | 9 . To place levels. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. top of wall. views of the project. such as roofs. By using a single project file. schedules. and drawings of the design. industry-standard terms familiar to most engineers. first floor. you can define new parametric elements in Revit MEP. This information includes components used to design the model. or bottom of foundation. If you can draw. Project: In Revit MEP. programming is not required. they are implied by what you do and how you draw. you do nothing to establish these relationships.This implementation provides flexibility for designers. Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. floors. Revit MEP makes it easy for you to alter the design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views. However. In Revit MEP. section views. and types. some terms are unique to Revit MEP. Often. for example. The project file contains all information for the building design.Elevation View Element: When creating a project. Understanding the following terms is crucial to understanding the software. you add Revit MEP parametric building elements to the design. Categories of annotation elements include tags and symbols. categories of model elements include mechanical equipment and air terminals. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building. Most often. Understanding Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 terms Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit MEP are common. the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. North . Revit MEP classifies elements by categories. For example. you must be in a section or elevation view. families. from geometry to construction data. and ceilings.

However. For example. such as a A0 title block. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. you can create different types of fittings with different compositions. A type can be a specific size of a family. although the pendant lights that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. ■ ■ ■ Revit MEP predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. ■ ■ In-place families are custom families that you create in the context of a project.Family: Families are classes of elements in a category. such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. Type: Each family can have several types. you can change the interface to better support the way that you work. Instance: Instances are the actual items (individual elements) that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the design (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances). For example. you cannot duplicate in-place family types to create multiple types. A type can also be a style. For example. and wires. Then experiment with them. System families can be transferred between projects. With a few clicks. You can also display several project views at one time. ■ Because in-place families are intended for limited use in a project. and rearranging interface components to support the way that you work. showing. each in-place family contains only a single type. identical use. but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. Unlike system and standard component families. Read the following topics to familiarize yourself with the basic parts of the Revit interface. a lighting fixture could be considered one family. and similar graphical representation. Parts of the Revit Interface The Revit MEP interface is designed to simplify your workflow. Create an in-place family when your project needs unique geometry that you do not expect to reuse or geometry that must maintain one of more relationships to other project geometry. 10 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . Using the Revit MEP User Interface Revit MEP is a powerful CAD product for the Microsoft® Windows operating system. pipes. you can set the ribbon to one of the three display settings for optimum use of the interface. Its interface resembles those of other products for Windows featuring a ribbon that contains the tools used to complete tasks. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. There are 3 kinds of families: ■ Loadable families can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. the behavior of a plumbing fitting is predefined in the system. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties. and you can place copies of the same in-place family element in your projects. A family groups elements with a common set of parameters (properties). You can create multiple in-place families in your projects. hiding. They are not available for loading or creating as separate files. System families include ducts. or layer the views to see only the one on top.

Minimize to Tabs: Shows tab labels. Parts of the Revit Interface | 11 . or drag the panel back to its original ribbon tab. To minimize the ribbon 1 Click (Show Full Ribbon) to the right of the ribbon tabs. 2 The minimize behavior cycles through the following minimize options: ■ ■ ■ Show Full Ribbon: Shows entire ribbon. Minimize to Panel Tiles: Shows tab and panel labels.Ribbon Overview The ribbon displays automatically when you create or open a file. you can click the top (or left) side to access the tool you probably use most often. To return the panel to the ribbon. Click the other side to expose a list of other related tools. Click a panel label and drag the panel off the ribbon to the desktop. or moving a panel off the ribbon to your desktop. Ribbon Tabs and Panels TIP When you see a button that shows a line dividing it into two sides. To move panels: ■ ■ Click a panel label and drag the panel to a desired place on the ribbon. The ribbon can be minimized for maximum use of the drawing area. and provides all the tools necessary to create your file. click the Return Panels to Ribbon button. Customize the ribbon by changing the panel order.

. select the tool first. project and system parameters. many of the tools you need to create and modify a family of elements. tools for collaboration with internal and external project team members. tools used for adding 2D information to a design. tools used for editing existing elements. data and systems. and settings. The Add-Ins tab is enabled only when a third-party tool is installed. third-party tools used with Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. tools to add and manage secondary items such as raster images. then select what you want to modify. and CAD files. many of the tools you need to create the MEP design. tools used for running analysis on the current design. Create (family files only) Insert Annotate Modify Analyze Architect Collaborate View Manage Add-Ins 12 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics .Examples of button that can be clicked on two sides The following table describes the ribbon tabs and the types of commands they contain. architect-specific tools.. There are a number of button types on the ribbon Ribbon Tab Home Includes commands for. and for switching views. tools used for managing and modifying the current view. When working on the Modify tab.

click the push pin icon in the bottom-left corner of the expanded panel. By default. displays frequently used tools. Placement Tools: contains the placement tools necessary for placing and connecting duct. closes the application menu (double-click). provides requested information. A dialog-launcher arrow on the bottom of a panel opens a dialog. Contextual Ribbon Tabs When you execute certain commands or select an element. Application Frame Overview The application frame contains tools and provides feedback to help you manage your Revit MEP projects.Expanded Panels A drop-down arrow at the bottom of a panel indicates that you can expand the panel to display additional tools and controls. provides access to common tools. a Place Duct contextual tab displays that has three panels: ■ ■ ■ Selection: contains the Modify command. application button application menu Quick Access toolbar InfoCenter Status Bar Parts of the Revit Interface | 13 . displays information related to the current state of a Revit operation. an expanded panel closes automatically when you click another panel. Element: contains Element Properties and the Type Selector. The application frame consists of five main areas described in the following table: Application Window Tool Description opens the application menu (single -click). a special contextual ribbon tab displays that contains a set of tools that relate only to the context of the command. For example. when adding duct. This contextual ribbon tab closes once you end the command. To keep a panel expanded.

. (Save) save the current drawing with a new name. click. (Export) On the application menu. Click to access the application menu and perform the following actions: to. (New) 14 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . NOTE Revit MEP options are set from Options on the application menu.The Application Menu The application menu provides access to many common file actions and also allows you to manage your files using more advanced commands.. such as Export and Publish. select a file to open. select a template and create a new drawing. (Open) save the current drawing.. Access common tools to start or publish a file in the application menu.. (Save As) export the current drawing.

provides views including Default 3D. family. saves a current project. or template file. (Print) access product and license information. annotation. to. Camera. (Licensing) close the file.. click. (Save) (Undo) (Redo) (Modify) (Synchronize and Modify Settings) (3D View) (Customize Quick Access Toolbar) Parts of the Revit Interface | 15 . publish the current project.. NOTE New displays on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down.On the application menu. (Publish) print the current drawing... family. reinstates the last cancelled action and displays a list of all reinstated actions performed during the session. enters selection mode and ends the current operation. To enable or disable a tool item. (Close) Using the Quick Access Toolbar The Quick Access toolbar contains the following items by default: Quick Access Toolbar Item (Open) Description opens a project. click next to it on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down. customizes the items displayed on the Quick Access toolbar. synchronizes a local file with that on the central server. annotation. but is not enabled by default. and Walkthrough. or template file. cancels the last action by default and displays a list of all actions taken during the session.

Starting with the most recent command. Clipboard. repeat the command. workshared components. the left side of the Status Bar provides tips or hints on what to do. check the Status Bar. displaying the same information. To hide the Status Bar. or the Family Editor. a tool tip appears next to the cursor. While in an edit mode (such as Modify Electrical Fixtures). click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down. NOTE There are some tools on contextual tabs that cannot be added to the Quick Access toolbar. or View Graphics panels persist on the toolbar for that mode. Editable Only: Filters selections to select only editable. Status Bar The Status Bar is located along the bottom of the Revit MEP application frame. To show the Status Bar again. Modify. Filter button: Displays how many elements are selected and refines the element categories selected in a view. The Quick Access toolbar can display below the ribbon.To undo or redo a series of operations. click the drop-down to the right of the Undo and Redo buttons. Exclude Options: Filters selections to exclude components that are part of a design option. you can select any number of previous commands to include in the Undo or Redo operation. the Status Bar displays the name of the family and type. Getting Hints About What to Do Next If you start a command (such as Rotate) and are not sure what to do next. In addition. When you are highlighting an element or component. Click Show Below the Ribbon on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar to change the display setting. However. Clear the Status Bar check mark. Group. This displays the command history in a list. It often displays tips or hints about what to do next for the current command. 16 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . items that are added to the Quick Access toolbar from the Create. Several other controls appear on the right side of the Status Bar ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Press & Drag: Allows you to click and drag an element without it selecting first. Active Only: Filters selections to select only active design option components. When you are using a command. when you switch to another editing mode. these items do not display and need to be re-added to the Quick Access toolbar.

Options Bar The Options Bar is located below the ribbon. On the Quick Access toolbar. Type Selector The Type Selector is located on the Element panel for the currently invoked tool.To cancel or exit the current command. When you place an element in a drawing. View Control Bar The View Control Bar is located at the bottom of the Revit window above the Status Bar. Its contents change depending on the current command or selected element. Its contents change depending on the current function or selected elements. click (Modify). do either of the following: ■ ■ Press ESC twice. for example. It provides quick access to functions that affect the drawing area. Then use the Type Selector to select the desired type. including the following: Parts of the Revit Interface | 17 . Place a Wall. select one or more elements of the same category. To change existing elements to a different type. use the Type Selector to specify the type of element to add.

you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window. 18 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics .■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Scale Detail Level Model Graphics Style Shadows On/Off Show/Hide Rendering Dialog (Available only when the drawing area displays a 3D view. you learn how to modify the views within your Revit MEP project.rvt. The 3D isometric view displays: 3 Click Navigation bar ➤ Zoom In Region drop-down to display the zoom menu. Zoom the view In the tutorials. There are several ways to access zoom options. In the following steps. For example. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire structure or floor plan in the view.) The zoom menu lists the zoom options. After you are familiar with these tasks. you open a training file and practice adjusting the view with the different zoom commands. (The Navigation bar is located in the top-right corner of the view. click Training Files. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_m. Crop View On/Off Show/Hide Crop Region Temporary Hide/Isolate Reveal Hidden Elements Modifying the View In this exercise. 1 Click ➤ Open. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the MEP design in the window. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog.

To modify or add snap increments. 4 Click Zoom Out (2x). Revit MEP uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. on the Navigation bar. the view zooms in on the selected area. use a zoom menu command to zoom out. NOTE As you zoom in and out. Zoom is also available using SteeringWheels. The view of the MEP design is sized to fit the available window. 5 Click Zoom To Fit. If you do not have a wheel mouse. 9 To display SteeringWheels. 7 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region to magnify. The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. and enter the shortcut ZR to zoom in on a region. In the drawing area. click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. the view zooms out from the mechanical piping design. click . Modifying the View | 19 . 6 Click in the drawing area. NOTE If the Navigation bar is not currently displayed click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and select Navigation bar. this is referred to as a crossing selection. Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire structure again. SteeringWheels provide 2D and 3D navigation tools. 8 If you use a mouse that has a wheel as the middle button.NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself activates the currently-selected zoom command. you can roll the wheel to zoom the view. When you release the mouse button.

14 To exit the wheel. You can change the pivot point by releasing the mouse button.The Full Navigation wheel displays in the drawing area. press ESC. 13 Drag the cursor up or right to zoom in. press F1 while the steering wheel is displayed. The cursor displays a pivot point for the Zoom tool. Reorient the view You can use the View Cube in 3D views to spin the design or reorient the view 15 Place the mouse cursor over the South compass portion of the ViewCube to highlight the direction indicator. and click tin the Options dialog. click 16 Click the Top compass direction indicator to switch to a Top view of the design. and then using the Zoom tool again. As you move the mouse. 10 Move the cursor over the Zoom wedge of the wheel so that it highlights. click the SteeringWheels tab. 12 Drag the cursor down or left to zoom out. 20 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . 11 Click and hold the mouse button. Click and drag to orbit the design. To define settings for SteeringWheels. For more information about SteeringWheels. ➤ Options. moving the wheel to the desired location. the wheel follows the cursor around the drawing area.

Small blue dots. display at the ends of selected objects in a plan view. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. After you are familiar with these tasks. 3 Click and drag the bottom control. and tops of selected elements in elevation views and 3D views. as shown. 2 Enter ZR. bottoms. These are the drag controls. referred to as shape handles. zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan.Design.HVAC Plan . Performing Common Tasks | 21 . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .Design ➤ Floor Plans. and open Level 2 .17 Click the Home icon to return to the original view. Performing Common Tasks In this exercise. called drag controls. it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area. display along the ends. moving the cursor up to shorten the duct. Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the duct. When drawing or modifying an MEP design. you learn to perform some of the common Revit MEP tasks that are included in the tutorials. Resize an element using drag controls 1 In the Project Browser. Similar controls. and select the duct.

or press CTRL+Z. you decide that you prefer to leave the duct as is. NOTE To quickly undo the previous action. 8 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command. Move an element 7 Select the same duct used in the previous steps. 22 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . The Undo command allows you to reverse the effects of one or more commands. 6 On the Undo menu. Undo commands 5 On the Quick Access toolbar.4 Click in the drawing area to deselect the duct. click the Undo command. Move. on the Standard toolbar. All changes you make to a project are tracked. Selecting the second item in the list will undo the last 2 actions. click the drop-down menu next to (Undo). In this example. select the first item in the list.

After selecting the element to move. as shown. The duct is moved to the new position. In this case. click to specify the starting position. 11 With the duct already selected.Some commands. you want to move the duct. Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location. 10 Move the cursor to the right. such as Move and Copy. require 2 clicks to complete the command. for example. 9 Click the midpoint of the duct. and drag it to the left as shown. and click again to specify the ending position. Performing Common Tasks | 23 .

such as the Modify Ducts command.Return. For example. under Visibility: ■ ■ ■ Clear Mechanical . you can also: ■ ■ Choose another command. click the drop-down menu next to supply return air duct. Notice that the return air duct is not displayed. you can specify visibility settings for specific elements in an HVAC plan in order to enable the display of supply duct and disable the display of return duct. Select Mechanical . stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command. (Undo) to redisplay the 24 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics .Supply. 13 To end a command. 15 On the Filters tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. 16 On the Quick Access toolbar.End a command Some commands. 14 Enter VG. Click OK. Override the display of objects You can control the visibility of objects in a view to display objects in specific ways. Press ESC twice. 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.

Performing Common Tasks | 25 .17 Close the file without saving your changes.

26 .

expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). under Template file. and click Open. under Create new. system families. click Training files. In that case. Finally. settings. or you can save a project and use it as a new project template. You then learn how to customize the template by modifying the project settings and discipline settings. click Browse. such as the default project units and settings.rte template. and geometry from the starting template. select Project. and loadable families. such as coordination review and interference checking. you can modify one template and use Transfer Project Standards to copy the changes to the other templates.Getting Started with MEP Projects 3 In this lesson you learn how to start a project from a template. you learn how to start a project from a template. You can choose from several templates. A project template enables you to start a project by providing initial conditions. Creating an MEP Project In this exercise. 2 In the New Project dialog. 6 Click OK. The template selection may vary depending on your installation. 7 In the Project Browser. such as ducts and pipes. 27 . link files. and modify system settings. 4 Select the m_Tutorial-Default. New projects inherit all the families. You also learn how to use collaboration tools. and open Metric ➤ Templates. You can either select a template from the template library. You may need to have a variety of office templates if your work requires it. Start a project from an existing template 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. create and manage views. 5 In the New Project dialog. the default building levels and standard views. you learn how to organize the project browser to make it easy to view and access your project files. The first step in creating your office template is deciding which template to use as your starting point. use copy/monitor. and open North. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog.

create another new project using the Construction template. Click OK. under Energy Analysis. Modify project settings Project settings control the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. for City. you can select the materials commonly used in most projects. 16 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. for Energy Data. Click OK twice. 28 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . 11 Close the file with or without saving it. Some templates are simple with respect to the predefined views and schedules. (Browse). 9 Close the file with or without saving it. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. For Location. When you select the material. Create a new project template based on the default systems template 12 Click ■ ■ ➤ New ➤ Project. 17 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. you can select it now. ■ ■ For Ground Plane. In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ On the Place tab. select Manchester. If you want to use a template other than the default.8 In the drawing area. select School or University. TIP This template is the starting point for your new template. In the Choose Template dialog. you can dictate its appearance in all views and when rendered.rte template and click Open. zoom to right side of the drawing area to view the level heads. review the construction materials listed. 14 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. select Sub-Discipline and click Modify. click Browse. For example. you can establish settings that are common to most projects. navigate to Metric Templates. click Edit. Notice that construction template is more complex than the default template and the view properties have been modified to maximize the use of various tools. select Project template. and select the Systems-Default_Metric. 10 Using the same method. To maintain office standards and reduce rework. select Level 1. Click Cancel. 18 In the Project Parameters dialog. NH. ■ ■ Under Create new. ■ For Building Construction. click ■ ■ In the Building Construction dialog. 13 In the New Project dialog: Under Template file. click (Browse).

for 90. and demand factors for electrical systems. for 20. 110.00 mm. Mechanical settings determine the behavior and appearance of the ductwork and piping for mechanical. Modify electrical settings Electrical settings determine the voltage. 21 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. they can be configured in a template file to avoid having to set them for each project. 22 In the right pane. and 310.00 mm. for 90. After standard settings have been established for an organization. 20 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings.000 mm. under Duct Settings.00 mm. 32 In the right pane: ■ ■ ■ For Hot Wire Tick Mark. Discipline settings can be defined for electrical and mechanical disciplines. ensure that M_Hook Wire Tick Mark is selected. 31 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. ensure that M_Long Wire Tick Mark is selected.rfa and click Open. under Pipe Settings. 140.00 mm. select Views. click Round. Creating an MEP Project | 29 . click Wiring.00 mm. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. 260. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. under Duct Settings. 26 In the right pane. click Sizes. and 140. select Identity Data. For Categories.00 mm. piping. Modify mechanical settings Revit MEP has discipline settings that define the appearance and behavior of the system components in a project. 25 In the left pane. For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. 110. wiring. For Ground Wire Tick Mark.00 mm. 29 In the Load Family dialog: ■ ■ Browse to the Metric Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks folder. click Rectangular. 27 Click OK.19 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Group parameter under. 33 Click OK. and fire protection systems. 23 In the left pane. 290.00 mm. Duct sizes that are not commonly used are removed from the sizing lists to avoid having them created when sizing or laying out ducts. 28 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. 30 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. Click OK twice. Define the tick marks that are used on wires by loading a family.00 mm. Holding CTRL. select M_Hook Wire Tick Mark.rfa and M_Long Wire Tick Mark. ensure that M_Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. power distribution systems. 24 In the right pane. plumbing.

You can also set filters to determine the number of views and sheets that are displayed. For Then by. Create a new project using the template created in the previous lesson 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. 30 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . synchronize the two models for monitoring changes. click Training. You can use these techniques to create templates that are customized to your projects. For Sort by. 36 On the Folders tab of the Browser Organization Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Group by. In addition. select Sub-Discipline. 35 On the Views tab of the Browser Organization dialog. For Then by. under Create new. sheets.Origin to Origin. Click Open. 4 In the New Project dialog.rvt. Select Metric\Arch Link Model_m. select Project.Organize the Project Browser The Project Browser lists all the views. Notice that the file is saved as a template. 3 Select the template you saved in the previous exercise and click Open. select Family and Type. Select Ascending Click OK twice. To enable this coordination. you link a Revit Architecture project to a Revit MEP project. and groups that are contained in a project. you link the architectural model with the MEP model. From the Positioning list. 34 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and click Browser Organization. You need to create the MEP model for the project. 2 In the New Project dialog. An architect has created a preliminary architectural model for a building project using Revit Architecture. 7 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. 5 Click OK. Link a file 6 Click Insert tab ➤ Link panel ➤ Link Revit. Close coordination between the two models is essential because the building envelope changes will directly affect the MEP design. families. select Associated Level. select Auto . click Browse. under Template file. and adjust the display settings of the Revit Architecture project. You can customize the organization of project views and sheets in the Project Browser to group them into folders. you can specify the order in which the views and sheets are displayed in the Project Browser. select Type/Discipline and click Edit. select View Name. 38 Close the file. Linking Projects In this exercise. 37 Save this file to a location on your local system.

15 Zoom to the right side of the building to view the levels. Add levels 14 Expand Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? and open North . 11 In the Type Properties dialog.Mech.The architectural model links to the MEP model and the current view remains active. 10 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. 13 Press ESC to deselect the linked model. reposition elevations in the plan view as shown. 12 Click OK. Enable bounding elements for spaces 9 In the drawing area. select Room Bounding. Linking Projects | 31 . select the linked architectural model. under Constraints. 8 If necessary.

25 Repeat the previous steps to adjust the level line for Level 2. 32 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . 23 Select the level line for Level 2 and click the value. Adjust level lines You can adjust the level lines in the MEP design to match the level lines in the architectural model. 21 Repeat the previous steps to create another level line for the roof.Floor. 18 In the Plan View Types dialog. click Plan View types. verify that Ceiling Plan and Floor Plan are selected and click OK.16 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. 19 On the left side of the view. click the level line for 03. 24 Enter ??? and press ENTER. 17 On the Options Bar. 20 Move the cursor to the right side of the view and click to insert the level line for Mechanical 3. 22 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.

you can copy elements within a current project or from a linked project to a host project. level 3. then click the architectural model level line labeled 01-Entry Level. appears above the copied elements. 26 Click Collaborate tab ➤ Coordinate panel ➤ Copy/Monitor drop-down ➤ Select Link. This establishes a relationship between the copied and original elements. click the MEP level line labeled Level 1. If you modify a monitored element. click By Host View. for the link file. 30 Repeat the previous steps to monitor the level lines for level 2. and click to select the linked model. of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. Using the Copy/Monitor tool. 35 On the Annotation Categories tab: ■ For Annotation Categories. and the level 4. click Finish to exit the Copy/Monitor tool. Warnings may also appear when the original element in the linked file is deleted or the copied element in the host file is deleted. 29 In the drawing area. a copied monitored element in the host project has changed. 27 In the drawing area. The Copy/Monitor tab is displayed. 31 On the Copy/Monitor tab. highlight the linked model. a warning message displays. appears and the monitor tool ensures that both level lines remain coordinated. Disable the display of architectural levels 32 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Visibility/Graphics.Monitor the architectural levels You can monitor the elements within a Revit MEP model. click Custom. These violations happen when the original monitored element from the linked project has changed. indicating that an element has changed. Linking Projects | 33 . select Custom. 34 On the Basics tab. After copying. 33 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. and when the monitored elements are not synchronized. warnings notify you of any violations. 28 Click Copy/Monitor tab ➤ Tools panel ➤ Monitor. which helps monitor changes to the original element and report differences. and that the copied elements are monitored. or both original monitored and copied elements have changed. indicating that a relationship is established.

3 In the View templates dialog. Select Show categories from all disciplines. enter Mechanical View and click OK. click Edit. 4 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility Graphics Override dialog. 5 On the Basics tab. 2 In the New View Template dialog. Roads. for the link file. of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. 36 Click OK. Under Visibility. Click OK.Mechanical and click Apply View Template. and Topography. 6 On the Model Categories tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Model Categories. Apply a view template 8 In the Project Browser. 34 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . Create a view template 1 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ View Templates drop-down ➤ Create template from current view.■ ■ ■ Select Show categories from all disciplines. Creating and Applying a View Template In this exercise. deselect Levels. deselect Parking. Site. you create a view template and apply it to your project template. click Custom. select Custom. right-click Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? ➤ North . Planting. under View Properties. Under Visibility. click Custom. for Name. Click OK. for V/G Overrides RVT Links. 7 Click OK twice.

under Template file. journal cleanup options. Modifying General System Options In this exercise. and your username when using worksharing.9 In the Apply View Template dialog. 10 Close the file with or without saving your changes. Set graphics settings 1 Click ➤ Options. 3 Under Colors. System settings are local to each computer and applied to all projects. notification preferences. you learn how to control the system settings for Revit MEP. they are not saved to project files or template files. Modifying System Settings | 35 . under View Templates. 5 In the New Project dialog. click the Graphics tab. select Invert background color. Notice that the drawing area is black. and open Metric\Templates\m_Tutorial_Default. 9 In the Options dialog. click Browse. 7 Click OK. 2 In the Options dialog. Modifying System Settings In this exercise.rte. 6 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. click Training Files. 4 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new project. click the Graphics tab. and click OK. 8 Click ➤ Options. you modify the settings that control your local Revit MEP working environment. These settings control the graphics. select Mechanical and click OK. selection default options.

10 Under Colors. and click OK. 21 Close the file without saving it. Specifying File Locations In this exercise. NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color. the elements causing the error display using this color. 36 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . 15 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. Set file locations 1 Click ➤ Options. select One hour. 19 Press ESC to end the command. 13 Under Notifications. click the File Locations tab. select None. Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red. 18 Select the wall. the Status Bar displays information about the highlighted element. These settings control locations of important Revit MEP files. and family libraries. 12 Click the General tab. you specify default file locations. 2 In the Options dialog. 11 In the Color dialog. 14 Click OK. 17 Press ESC to end the command. 16 Sketch a straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area. 20 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it. specify the following options: ■ ■ For Save reminder interval. However. select yellow. When an error occurs. click the value for Selection color. For Tooltip assistance. family template files. Notice that a tooltip is not displayed. including your default project template.

6 In the Browse For Folder dialog. there are some circumstances where you may need to modify the path. Load. and click Open. saving. click Browse. The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation. 4 Click Cancel. 8 Click Cancel. Click and click Browse to select a template. 10 In the Places dialog. select the folder to save your files to by default. It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path. An icon for each library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open. 5 Under Default path for user files. However. note the list of library names. Notice that you can choose an industry-specific template as your default template. MEP firm where customized templates reside on a network drive. under Default path for family template files.3 Under Default template file. This path is set automatically during the installation process. You can modify the existing library names and path. Specify library settings and create a new library 9 In the Options dialog. click Browse. click Places. When you are opening. In the following illustration. such as in a large. 7 In the Options dialog. Specifying File Locations | 37 . and Import dialogs. Save. TIP To view a template. ➤ New ➤ Project. and you can create new libraries. or loading a Revit MEP file. you can click on the library folder located in the left pane of the dialog. centralized. notice that the libraries display as icons in the left pane of the dialog. These are the family templates that you use to create new families. Each library path points Revit MEP to a folder of families or training files. you can start a new project with that template. click Browse.

➤ Open. 14 Navigate to C:\My Documents or a folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit MEP projects. click (Add Value). templates. and click OK twice. 13 Click in the Library Path field for My Library. 18 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 16 Click 17 Click (Move Rows Up) until My Library is at the top of the list. and click (Browse). TIP You may want to create a new folder first. click the My Library icon. and change the name to My Library. The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open. 12 Click in the Library Name field of the new library. and select it as the library path. 15 Under Library Name. Save. and Import dialogs. The library icons display in the order in which they are listed in the Options dialog. or families. Load. 38 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . click My Library.11 In the Places dialog. and click Open.

Specifying Spelling Options In this exercise. If you work in a large office.Notice that Revit MEP navigates directly to the library path. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. 4 Under Personal dictionary contains words added during spell check. click Edit. 11 In the Options dialog. click Edit. 20 Click ➤ Options. This path is determined during installation. 21 On the File Locations tab. and decal image files. 9 In the text editor. If you want to relocate this path. 13 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary. select Ignore words in uppercase. you can specify the locations of other files used to define render appearances. click Places. enter sheetmtl-Cu. scroll down to view the list of building industry terms. 14 Click in the drawing area. custom color files. It allowed SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase. and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU. 10 Click File menu ➤ Exit. click the Spelling tab. such as bump maps. Specifying Spelling Options | 39 . you modify the spelling settings and the custom dictionaries for Revit MEP. 16 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Spelling. 3 Under Settings. 12 Create a new project using the default template. Specify rendering settings 25 Click the Rendering tab. 15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. you may want to set up an office library on a network path to increase productivity and maintain office standards. 27 Click OK. Under Additional Render Appearance Paths. 26 Under Render Appearance Library Location. 5 In the text editor. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. 8 Under Building industry dictionary. 19 Click Cancel. Modify spelling settings 1 Click ➤ Options. click OK. This path specifies the location of the Render Appearance Library. (Remove Value) to delete the library. specify the new location here. 23 Click 24 Click OK. 22 Select My Library. view the current path. 2 In the Options dialog. 7 Click File menu ➤ Exit.

under Template file. or use the shortcut keys to force a particular snap method. 40 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . 25 Close the file without saving it. 5 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. This command resets the spelling settings to their original configuration. 21 Under Personal dictionary. you modify snap increments. Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments. Snap settings are system settings that are applied to all projects and not saved within a project file. and then click File menu ➤ Exit. Modify snap increments 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit MEP project. delete sheetmtl-CU.. 22 In the text editor. 19 In the Options dialog. click OK. 2 In the New Project dialog. As you zoom in and out within a view. In this exercise. click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 1000 . click OK. and open Metric\Templates\m_Tutorial_Default. you modify snap settings. Modifying Snap Settings In this exercise. 18 Click ➤ Options. click the Spelling tab. click Training Files. 20 Under Settings. click Restore Defaults. You can add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it.17 In the Spelling dialog.rte. click Edit. click File menu ➤ Save. work with snapping turned off. 4 In the New Project dialog. Revit MEP uses the largest increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. click Browse. 6 In the Snaps dialog. 23 In the text editor. You can turn snap settings on and off. and use shortcut keys to control snapping on an instance basis. under Dimension Snaps. and enter 500 . click Close. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. 24 In the Options dialog.

This is the increment that you added previously. 10 On the Options Bar. click OK. 11 Click in the center of the drawing area. deselect Chain. TIP To zoom while sketching. 12 While sketching a generic straight wall. zoom out until it does so. For example. You can use these shortcut keys at any time when working on the design. you can also use the zoom shortcut keys.7 Under Object Snaps. 9 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to 500 mm. Notice that the listening dimension snaps at 1000 mm increments. While sketching. use the wheel button on your mouse. If it does not. notice the 2-letter acronyms next to each object snap option. and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you commit an action. Sketch without snapping 13 While sketching the wall. 8 In the Snaps dialog. A listening dimension refers to the dimension that displays while you are sketching. if you want to snap an object to a wall midpoint. This dimension reacts to the movement of the cursor and numerical keyboard entries. you can right-click and select a zoom option from the shortcut menu. and move the cursor to the right. After you click to place the object at the midpoint. such as ZO to zoom out. Modifying Snap Settings | 41 . snapping reverts to the system default settings. enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off. If you do not have a wheel button. enter SM.

and the wall edges. 21 Click to start the wall at the midpoint.. the midpoint. This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints. 17 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall.Notice that when snapping is turned off completely. Do not set the wall end point. Use snapping shortcut keys 16 Click Place Wall tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 20 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall. When you use shortcut keys to control snapping. it will snap to the endpoints. 24 Under Dimension Snaps. the listening dimension reflects the exact length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right. the command is only active for one click of the mouse. 15 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall. 14 Click to set the wall endpoint. Notice that snapping is once again active. 25 Click OK. 42 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall. Make sure you also delete the semicolon. 26 Close the file. 19 Enter SM. and delete the value 500 . 23 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. click in the Length dimension snap increments box. If you move the cursor along the wall. 22 Move the cursor downward. and specify the wall endpoint. 18 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously. and move the cursor to the right. with or without saving it.

you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan mechanical systems. You also learn how to design a mechanical air system and a mechanical piping system. 43 .Creating a Mechanical System In this tutorial.

44 .

you follow a series of lessons and exercises that teach the recommended system design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. water source heat pump (WSHP).Planning Mechanical Systems 4 In this tutorial.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. you first configure the linked architectural model. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training FilesMetric directory. However. you can choose to save your work. In this lesson. In this exercise. you begin planning the system by placing spaces in the building. After applying a color scheme to the zones. you prepare a floor plan so that you can place spaces in later exercises. If the tutorial training files are not present. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. Then you assign zones to the spaces in order to control the spatial environment. duct system and a hydronic piping system. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. and specific techniques for designing mechanical systems. As you create the mechanical system. This workflow begins with system planning and concludes with system designing. Preparing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. This system consists of a cooling tower. methodology. and then you create a plenum level. you first plan the system. At the end of the tutorial. you design a mechanical system for an office building. Because most MEP engineers work with a linked model during system design. 45 . you will understand the process. you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis to determine the heating and cooling requirements for the building. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. By following the recommended workflow. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. To create a mechanical system in Revit MEP. go to http://www.autodesk. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. you learn best practices for system design while understanding how Revit MEP makes systems design more efficient. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to design a mechanical system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. After finishing each exercise.

rvt. The status bar located at the bottom of the window and the tooltip indicate the Linked Revit Model. 46 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_01_m. and double-click West . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ MEP . Configure the linked model for space bounding The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. indicating that it’s the active view. 6 In the Project Browser. This makes the architectural components (such as walls. In this section. click to select it. NOTE When working with a linked file. 1 In the Project Browser. The linked model is configured to place spaces using the linked building geometry to define the space volume. make certain that architectural elements (such as walls. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . select Room Bounding. and ceiling) are defined as room-bounding. and after the linked model highlights. Add a Plenum level You create plenum levels so that you can place spaces in the unoccupied plenum areas (between the ceiling and the floor above) of the building. Next. click Training Files. under Constraints. not in the MEP training file. you configure a linked model in order to begin designing systems in it.MEP.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. ceilings. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Space Plan is highlighted. 3 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. and click OK. You must place spaces in all areas (occupied and unoccupied) of the building to create an accurate analytical model and achieve an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. roof.Design ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). These components are defined in the architectural training file. 2 Place the cursor over the linked model. and floors) recognized as boundaries for spaces. you add a level for plenums. 5 Press Esc to clear the selection.

Verify that Make Plan View is selected. 16 Press Esc. verify that only Floor Plan is selected. Modify plenum properties 17 In the Project Browser. For Offset. and click Properties. This creates only a floor plan after the level is added. 12 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. and select Level : Plenum from the Type Selector drop-down. A black datum indicates a reference level (the level is not taken into account during the creation of a view template). offset by the Offset value ( 2600mm) above level 2. A new plenum floor plan view named Level 2 Plenum is created. Click Plan View Types. Click the right endpoint of the Level 2 line. ■ 11 Draw a plenum level above Level 2 as follows: ■ ■ Click the left endpoint of the Level 2 line to specify the start point of the plenum level.7 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. 15 When asked to rename the corresponding level and views. click 10 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ (Line). right-click Level 2 Plenum. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans. 9 On the Draw panel. and a blue datum indicates that a plan view exists for the level. and enter Level 2 Plenum. and in the Plan View Types dialog. 13 Zoom in on the right side of the elevation view. click Yes (this will happen every time you create a new level). and is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans. Preparing Spaces | 47 . enter 2600mm. 8 Click Place Level tab ➤ Element panel. 14 Double-click the level name (Level 4). and click OK. The new level is placed.

select Plenum Plan. You apply the default view template so that only the architectural floor plan displays. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. In this exercise. Under View Depth. you created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view in preparation of placing spaces. enter an Offset of 300mm. for Top. select Level Above (Level 3).Plenum. For Cut plane. select MEP . For Sub-Discipline. Apply a view template 19 Open the Level 2 Plenum view. Under Extents. The view graphics are modified based on the template applied.18 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. Under Identity Data. 21 Close the file with or without saving it. ■ Click OK twice. select Design. NOTE After finishing each exercise. and for Offset. it is highly recommended that you always begin each exercise by opening the training file that Autodesk provides. for View Scale. However. In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. For View Classification. you can choose to save your work. for Default View Template. In the next exercise. enter 0. verify that 1 : 100 is selected. click Edit. and click Apply Default View Template. 20 In the Project Browser. you use space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area. 48 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . Notice that the site plan displays in the view. In this exercise.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans in the Project Browser. you place spaces in areas of the building model. for Level. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. and then place spaces in various types of areas. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. for View Range. The Level 2 Plenum floor plan is now listed under MEP . right-click Level 2 Plenum. Placing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. verify that Associated Level (Level 2 Plenum) is specified with an offset of 0.

2 Zoom to the empty room to the left of the corridor. This specifies the vertical extent of the space. select Horizontal. select Level 2 Plenum. walls. ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is cleared. For (Tag Location). enter 0. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 6 Place the cursor in the room until the space snaps to the room-bounding elements (floor. indicating that it’s the active view.rvt. and select M_Space Tag-No Name from the Type Selector drop-down. click Training Files. 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. For Upper Limit. You can also use the Highlight Boundaries feature to view boundary elements in the model. Placing Spaces | 49 . For Space. and ceilings). Spaces can be created automatically and numbered in sequence by using the Create Automatically tool. 5 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. Place a space 1 In the Project Browser. For Offset. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_02_m.Space Plan is highlighted. select New. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space.

50 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. ■ 11 Press Esc to clear the selection. 14 In the drawing area. Click OK. double-click the section head in the Library to open the section view (Section 26). 10 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Identity Data. 9 Select the space. for Number. Prepare the plenum view 12 Open Design ➤ MEP . enter Library. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. enter 219. For Name.7 Click to place the space. The software automatically zooms the new view to the same location as in the open view. ensuring coordination between the files. 8 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. 13 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. Notice that the space number and name now match the room number and name from the linked architectural file.

17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. change the space name to Plenum and the number to 219P. Place a space in the plenum 16 Click in the Level 2 Plenum floor plan to activate it. demonstrating the parametric functionality of the software. 21 Using the method learned previously. 19 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. and then click Modify. Placing Spaces | 51 . 18 Select M_Space Tag-No Name from the Type Selector drop-down. Notice that the space is created in the section view at the same time. enter 0. For Offset. 20 Click in the Library to place the space. select Level 3. For Upper Limit.15 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.

52 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . This is beneficial to split up large volumes for equipment selection and sizing. 24 Notice that the floor plan has updated with the changes. under Energy Analysis.22 In the Instance Properties dialog. and then split the space using a space separation line. 25 Close the file with or without saving it. Placing a Space in an Open Area In this exercise. select Plenum and verify that Occupiable is cleared. you place a space in a large corridor area. 23 Click OK.

and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_03_m. 5 On the Options Bar. 2 Zoom in to the central corridor near the stairs. 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel. and for Offset. indicating that it’s the active view.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space.rvt. Place a space in an open area 1 In the Project Browser. Placing a Space in an Open Area | 53 . select Level 3. and select M_Space Tag-No Name from the Type Selector drop-down. for Upper Limit.Space Plan is highlighted. verify that Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 6 Click above the top stair to place the corridor space. click Training Files. and then press Esc. enter 0.

and change the space number to 216A. notice the corresponding architectural room name and number. 8 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Schedule. click in the name column. which was numbered 219Q. and select Corridor. and scroll to the newly placed space. 10 Click in the number column.7 In the Project Browser. 9 In the schedule. 54 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . In the schedule.

Placing a Space in an Open Area | 55 . 11 Close the schedule view. 12 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space Separator. Notice the changed boundaries of the corridor space. 14 Click perpendicular to the opposite curtain wall to end the horizontal separation line.Notice that the tag updates with the number change. 13 To specify the start point of the separation line. click the endpoint of the lower wall in space Instruction 221. and double-click the title of the plan view to maximize the view. as shown. 15 Press Esc twice.

56 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . place a space in the lower area of the split space.16 Using the method learned previously. and change the upper limit to account for the entire volume of the chase. you place a space in a chase. 17 Change the name of the space to Corridor. 18 Close the file with or without saving it. with an upper limit of Level 3 and an offset of 0. Placing a Multi-Level Space In this exercise. The new space is numbered correctly (216B).

Click in the Male restroom to specify the section endpoint.rvt. Add a multi-level space 1 In the Project Browser. indicating that it’s the active view. click Training Files. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Use the lower drag control to change the section boundary as shown.Space Plan is highlighted. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and place a section in the view as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click in the Cafeteria space to specify the section start point.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Placing a Multi-Level Space | 57 . If necessary. click (Flip Section) to reorient the section. 2 Zoom to the chase between the male (226) and female (225) restrooms in the north wing. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_04_m. Shading is a visual indication of where spaces have been placed (shaded) and where they need to be placed (empty).

select Level 3. 10 In the plan view. 6 Enter VG. but that the space does not fill the entire chase. expand Spaces. 8 Enter WT to tile the views.4 Press Esc. add a space: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. and then click OK. select Roof Level. select Interior and Reference. select the space. and click Element Properties. On the Options Bar. 7 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. click in the chase area to place the space. For Offset. 13 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Under Constraints. enter 0. In the plan view. 5 Double-click the section head to open the section view. right-click. Notice that you can see the space in the section view as well as in the plan view. for Upper Limit. 58 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 12 Click in the section view. 11 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. for Upper Limit. 9 Zoom each view as necessary in order to view the chase.

18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. floors. the space displays the volume up to the roof only. For Number. for Name. and maximize the view. and roofs) define the extent of space volume used in calculations.■ For Limit Offset. and click OK. ceilings. 19 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. Placing a Multi-Level Space | 59 . enter 225PC. 17 Type ZF. select Space Tag-No Name : Space Tag With Volume. All spaces in the view are tagged. Because the chase space is limited by a bounding element. ■ ■ 14 Click OK. Bounding elements (such as walls. You enter a value that is above the level of the roof. Tag spaces 16 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . Under Identity Data. enter Chase.Space Plan. under Loaded Tags. 15 Press Esc. enter 1200.

click Training Files. indicating that it’s the active view. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 4 Double-click Default to display a list of the spaces in the building model. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. Notice that Default is currently the only zone. click View ➤ Zones. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_01_m.rvt. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 1 In the Project Browser. The System Browser opens and docks to the right of the drawing area. and verify that All Disciplines is selected. Viewing Zones in the System Browser After spaces are placed in the building. Zones allow you to control the spatial environment and to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. The browser is a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones to which they have been assigned. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. you work with zones in order to control the spatial environment and perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. You used space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area that was part of a larger area. it is automatically added to the Default zone. The recommended workflow is to add each space to a zone that you create. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 3 Right-click in the System Browser. In the next exercises. and you placed spaces for various types of areas. you view and verify zones in the System Browser. To display space reference lines. NOTE A space cannot be placed into an area without being added to a zone. You have created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view. which removes the space from the Default zone. under Spaces. Revit MEP immediately adds them to the Default zone. In this exercise. click Reference.Zoning is highlighted. After a space is placed in an area. 60 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .20 Close the file with or without saving it.

verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . and verify the zones in the System Browser. indicating that it’s the active view. Next. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_02_m. You can change the Occupiable parameter for each space. indicating that the space is occupiable. 6 In the Instance Properties dialog. The new zone is listed in the System Browser. Assign spaces to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. and click OK. The graphic in the System Browser updates. click Reference. you assign spaces to a zone.The different graphics in the System Browser indicate whether a space is occupiable ( unoccupiable ( ). 7 Close the file with or without saving it. As you do this. double-click 121 Cafeteria. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone.Zoning is highlighted. select Occupiable. To display space reference lines. you assign spaces to zones in the building. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.rvt. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. under Spaces. under Energy Analysis. ) or 5 In the System Browser. you will use the System Browser to confirm that the spaces are in the new zone. Creating Zones on a Single Level In this exercise. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. the Edit Zone tab displays. Creating Zones on a Single Level | 61 . and a new zone is created. The Zone tool is active. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files.

you need to activate the zone visibility. Using the Edit Zone tab. The zone reference line indicates that the 3 spaces are in the zone. Click OK. and Electrical 220 spaces. Expand HVAC Zones. ■ The new zone displays with color fill and a zone reference line. type VG. 3 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. you can add or remove a space from the zone. and then select only Interior Fill and Reference Lines (clear Boundary and Color Fill). and Electrical spaces are added to it (and removed from the Default zone). and click Finish Editing Zone. select HVAC Zones. Instruction 221. and modify the zone properties. You work with a single zone until you click Finish. 6 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog: ■ ■ Under Visibility. 5 With the drawing area active. 4 In the drawing area. select Computer Lab 222. To view the zone in the drawing area. 62 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . In the System Browser.NOTE The Edit Zone tab provides zone tools and information. Instruction. expand the new zone and notice that the Computer Lab.

click Reference. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. indicating that it’s the active view.rvt. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click Finish Editing Zone. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog.West . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. expand 2 .Zoning view to activate it. 5 Click in the Level 1 . and verify the zone in the System Browser. You activated zone visibility in the views. Creating Zones on Multiple Levels | 63 .TIP After you finish editing the zone. 2 Zoom in to Lounge 215 (to the right of the central stairs). Create a zone for spaces on multiple levels 1 In the Project Browser. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_03_m. you assign spaces on multiple levels to a zone in the building. 10 On the Edit Zone tab. The new zone name displays in the System Browser. 3 Open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . under Identity Data. click Training Files. In this exercise. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .West . you can drag the zone reference line to relocate it and better view the spaces that are in the zone. and verified the zones in both the floor plan views and in the System Browser. Creating Zones on Multiple Levels In this exercise. and then click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Zone Properties. 4 Enter WT to tile the 2 windows.Area B. 11 Close the System Browser. Rename the zone 7 Select the zone.Zoning. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click OK. under Spaces. 9 In the System Browser. for Name. you assigned zones to spaces that were on the same level of the building. To display space reference lines. 12 Close the file with or without saving it.Zoning is highlighted. enter 2 .Area B to confirm that the 3 spaces are in it. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces.

Zoning view. 8 In the Level 1 . 10 Click Finish Editing Zone. 64 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . Verify that the distance is 12mm.Zoning view. zoom out. 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 9 With the Add Space tool active. 14 Click in the Lounge space to tag the associated zone. 7 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. and then select the tag so that you can use the drag control to move it as desired. select Lounge 120 to add it to the zone. 15 Press Esc. click in the Level 2 .6 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone. 13 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is selected. and add the Lounge 215 space to the zone.Zoning floor plan. Tag a zone 11 Activate the Level 1 . Select Attached End.

and Left corners converge to orient the model as shown. Working with the Analytical Model | 65 . enter Lounge . and click OK. Because the heating and cooling loads calculations have not been performed. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_01_m.The tag only displays in the view where it was placed. You can expand the zone in the System Browser to view the spaces in it. double-click Level 1 . the tag displays “Not Computed” for those values. and zone information. click the corner where the Top. Rename the zone 16 In the Level 1 . click Training Files. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. 19 Close the file with or without saving it. and view graphical representations of the spaces to verify space boundaries and volumes. The new zone name displays in the System Browser. Working with the Analytical Model In this exercise. space. 18 Press F9 to display the System Browser. you created a zone for spaces on different levels of the building. for Name Value.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Verify building information 1 In the Project Browser. In this exercise. and select 109 Lounge. you verify the building.Zoning to make it the active view. 5 On the Details tab: ■ Expand 1_South_Area C.East.Zoning view. View a space 3 In the preview pane of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. verify that Wireframe is selected. on the ViewCube. 4 On the View Selector (located below the preview pane). Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. double-click the zone tag. Front. NOTE Wireframe displays the volume of a space measured by the interior boundaries. 17 In the Change Parameter Values dialog. under Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans.

The space for 109 Lounge highlights in red. Next. select 1_South_Area C. Using the Highlight tool. click (Isolate). You can also view a space in relation to the other spaces or architecture in the entire building. TIP You can use the ViewCube to spin/reorient the view.The Details tab contains a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones that have been assigned to them. The space displays while all other spaces are hidden. ■ Click (Highlight). you isolate the space. you can verify that the space boundaries are as you defined them. The Isolate tool allows you to verify one or more spaces even if they are usually obstructed by other spaces or by the building architecture. 66 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . With 109 Lounge selected. Right-click in the preview pane to access pan and zoom commands. ■ ■ On the Details tab. All spaces in the zone display in isolation. ■ Click to deactivate the Highlight tool.

cooling air temperature. click . For Cooling Information. and humidification set point. click . select 109 Lounge. the space information displays for the selected space. and in the People dialog. verify that 21. you allow the values to be calculated by the loads engine. Revit MEP provides default settings for space types. NOTE By not specifying values for the humidification set point and dehumidification set point.22 °C : N/A is specified. This specifies the number of people or the area per person for the space. ■ ■ For Outdoor Air Information. This specifies the lighting and power loads for the space. verify that <Building> is selected.33 °C : 12. and then click OK. verify that <Default> is selected for Occupancy and Heat Gain (per person). verify that N/A : N/A : N/A is specified.11 °C : 32. Working with the Analytical Model | 67 . select Lounge/Recreation. This indicates the cooling set point. verify that <Building> is selected. These specify the space usage and construction materials for the space. 10 Verify the zone information: ■ ■ For Service Type. scroll down in the left pane. and in the Electrical Loads dialog. For Heating Information. Verify zone information 9 Select 1_South_Area C. For Electrical Loads. the zone information displays for the selected zone. verify that 23. and then click OK. Below the list of spaces and zones.22 °C : N/A is specified. and air changes per hour. This indicates the outdoor air per person. click . For People. For Construction Type. Below the list of spaces and zones. you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the zone. you use the Shading view to examine the inner volume of the model for voids. Verify space information 7 On the Details tab. you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the space. heating air temperature. Next. click (Shading). This indicates the heating set point. and dehumidification set point. ■ ■ ■ Next. and click OK. This is usually preferable to indicating a particular percentage for those parameters. You can use the Space Type Settings dialog to adjust settings as necessary. verify that <Default> is selected for Lighting Values and for Power Values. View the shaded model 11 On the View Selector. outdoor air per area. Next.6 Click to deactivate the Isolate tool. and in the Space Type Settings dialog. 8 Verify the space information: ■ For Space Type.

Add a space to fill a void 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. 15 In the Project Browser. floors. For Offset. 16 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. roofs. 68 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . and other room-bounding components. The inner volume is bounded by interior surfaces of walls. and then click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. enter 0. 13 Deactivate the Isolate tool. Notice that there is a void in a second-floor plenum space. and zoom to the corner of the building as shown. 18 Click in the empty plenum area to place the space. open MEP . select Level 3. 12 Using the methods learned previously.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. 17 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Upper Limit. highlight and isolate the space for 109 Lounge to view its inner volume.NOTE Shading displays the inner volume of a space. click Cancel.

space. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 69 . and you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis. Click OK. notice that Condition Type is Heated and Cooled. In this exercise. For Name. 25 Open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. and zone information. 22 Click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Zone panel ➤ Edit Zone. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. you specify project settings that affect heating and cooling. The report that is the result of this analysis allows you to determine the heating and cooling demands of the building. Because this is an unoccupied space.Modify space properties 19 Select the space. Training File ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. select the zone that includes all plenum spaces for Level 2 (named 2_Plenum). Under Energy Analysis. and viewed the spaces in the preview pane to verify space boundaries and volumes. Under Energy Analysis. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. it doesn’t need to be included in the heating and cooling loads analysis. enter 212P. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads In this exercise. 23 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. you verified building. ■ ■ Add the plenum space to a zone 21 In the drawing area. for Number. select Plenum. and verify that the space has replaced the void. Notice that Condition Type updates to Unconditioned. and select space Plenum 212P. 24 Click Finish Editing Zone. select Plenum.

click Edit. under Volume Computations. Select Automatically adjust the clock for daylight savings changes. verify that Areas and Volumes is selected (default setting). for City. For Building Construction. under Energy Analysis. When the location is in an area that observes Daylight Savings Time. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_02_m. is selected. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is specified. and then click In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ ■ .Space Plan. If. ■ ■ In the Type Properties dialog.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. verify that Use closest weather station (Manchester Airport) is selected.rvt. For Location. Click OK twice. On the Place tab. verify that <Building> is specified. select School or University. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans. and click OK. first highlight it using the cursor so that the space crossing lines display. In order to select a space. and click OK. you need to select this option. for Energy Data. verify that Simple with Shading Surfaces is selected. right-click. verify that Manchester. verify that 300 is specified. you receive a message that the Areas and Volumes option is not checked and that the space volumes will be approximate. For Project Phase. Specify project settings 1 In the Project Browser. 4 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. For Ground Plane. For Postal Code. after opening the Heating and Cooling Loads tool. 7 Zoom in to the center area of the building. verify that New Construction is selected. verify that Level 1 is selected. 3 In the Instance Properties dialog. NH. double-click Level 2 . 70 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . this option adjusts the times automatically. enter 03101. click Training Files. For Sliver Space Tolerance. select space Library 219. 8 In the drawing area. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. For Export Complexity. for Building Service. On the Weather tab. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify area and volume setting 5 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Area and Volume Computations. NOTE The Areas and Volumes option must be selected in order to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. 6 On the Computations tab of the Area and Volume Computations dialog. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. and click Element Properties. click in the Value field.

Click OK. In the People dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Occupancy. verify that Occupiable is selected. or neither. select Specified. select Specified. m. enter 60 W. If a (Warning) displays for any space in the building. both. Under Heat Gain (per Person). For Sensible. for Values. For Location. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 71 . For People. verify that School or University is selected. click Edit. verify that Manchester. If you have made changes to settings in the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. you view the space and zone volumes in the building model. You can view the building materials for this construction type by clicking Building Construction dialog). click Edit. For Latent. for Values. and then click . and click to learn the cause for the warning. Next. and click OK. verify the settings specified earlier: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type.Audio Visual. enter 45 W. click in the Value column. 11 On the General tab of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog.9 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Energy Analysis. and enter 15 sq. (opens the IMPORTANT The Heating and Cooling Loads dialog contains building information that only affects the heating and cooling loads analysis. This is the parameter that determines whether a space is included in a heating load. For Building Construction. You have verified the building information. for Values. NH. select Actual. it should be corrected before you calculate loads. For Condition Type. verify that <Building> is specified. Click OK twice. For Space Type. for Values. a cooling load. ■ ■ For Electrical Loads. select Actual. Select Area per person. is specified. In the Electrical Loads dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Lighting. select Heated and cooled. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Space Type Settings dialog. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is selected. 12 Click the Details tab. Under Power. Select the space associated with the warning. select Library . 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. For Building Service. Revit MEP stores this information as project information.

verify that Heating Set Point is 21. space. click Information). click the blue hyperlink for 219 Library. and then re-open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog to begin calculations.Space Plan. space. you performed a heating and cooling loads analysis on your building and viewed the loads report. you assign a color scheme to a zone in the building. review the Calculated Loads and Design Loads. 22 Close the file with or without saving it. The Electrical Loads display as 0 W because you have not yet calculated the loads. Various factors (such as analytical and inner volumes of the spaces) are analyzed as Revit MEP performs the heating and cooling loads analysis. and under Heating Information. or make any changes to the model. select 219 Library. you can rezone the model as necessary to optimize equipment usage in the building. the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog closes. 19 In the drawing area. 15 Review the loads report for project. After the heating and cooling loads analysis is completed. The information for the space that you entered in the Element Properties dialog displays. 17 In the loads report. under Energy Analysis. and zone information for the building model. weather.click OK to save your changes and close the dialog. and can be modified here. NOTE You must perform a new heating and cooling loads analysis each time you modify building. and then click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. In this exercise. 13 Under 2_Middle_Library. Perform a heating and cooling loads analysis 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. under the zone summary for 2_Middle_Library. 18 Close the report and activate Level 2 . See Help for more information about the integrated heating and cooling loads analysis tool and its calculation methods. You are taken to the place in the report where the space information is displayed for review. 21 Click OK. Notice that the space information was automatically updated. click Calculate. Creating a Zone Color Scheme In this exercise. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog. otherwise the loads report or schedules will not reflect your changes. ■ Select 2_Middle_Library. or zone information. You should correct the space error in the building model. A color scheme allows you to communicate and identify parameters visually and spatially rather than by using space schedules or accessing element properties. select 219 Library. (Zone Heating ■ In the Heating Information dialog.11°C. 16 After you review the loads report. 72 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . and click OK. There should be no warnings displayed. and a loads report displays. TIP You can find all generated Loads Reports in the Project Browser under Reports.

click to the right of the building to place the legend. Assign a color scheme to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files.rvt. Notice that the cooling load is based on watts. Click OK. indicating that it’s the active view. 3 In the drawing area. verify that Cooling Load by Zone is selected. 4 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Space Type. 5 Zoom in to the legend. Creating a Zone Color Scheme | 73 . You want a scheme that allows for a greater range. select HVAC Zones. in relatively small increments. 2 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. For Color Scheme. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_03_m.Zoning Load Fill is highlighted. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 .

9 Type ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area.Expanded Ranges. select Cooling Load . The new scheme allows for a greater range of cooling load values. select the color scheme legend. under Schemes. 74 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . The colors are updated in the plan view to match the new scheme type. 7 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. 8 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog.Select a different color scheme legend 6 In the drawing area. and click OK. The new scheme displays in the view.

add a Cooling Load by Zone color scheme to the HVAC zones of the section view. you use it as a design tool to determine whether the correct amount of airflow is being supplied to each of the rooms in the model. In the next exercise. you applied a color scheme to the zones in your building. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_04_m. Instead of placing this schedule on sheets as a construction document. you create a schedule that you use as a design tool for the supply air system.Apply a color scheme to a section view 10 In the Project Browser. In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Creating an Airflow Schedule In this exercise. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 75 . click Training Files. open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26. You then use the schedule to adjust the air terminal airflow properties to more closely meet design requirements. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you create a schedule for the supply air system project. 12 Close the file with or without saving it. 11 Using the method learned previously.rvt.

For Name. Select Formula. click (Browse). For Discipline. add Actual Supply Airflow to the formula. select Spaces. Click OK. select New Construction. select Spaces. 76 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . In the Fields dialog. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. and click OK. In the Calculated Value dialog. For Phase. enter Space Airflow Schedule. more category options are available. ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify schedule properties 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ At the bottom left of the dialog. the calculated value named Airflow Delta displays under Scheduled fields and will display as a column in the schedule. In the Schedule Properties dialog. select HVAC. enter Airflow Delta. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Report and Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. select Air Flow. double-click: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Level Number Name Calculated Supply Airflow Actual Supply Airflow The selected fields are added to the Scheduled fields section.Define the schedule 1 In the Project Browser. Define the airflow delta formula 5 In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. For Type. ■ ■ Using the method learned previously. for Select available fields from. select Calculated Supply Airflow. If you select Show categories from all disciplines. Select Schedule building components. and then click . verify that Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 .Space Fill is the active view.(minus sign) after Calculated Supply Airflow. enter . Click OK. For Formula. ■ Click Calculated Value. Under Available fields. for Formula.

Under Conditions to Use. For Then by. click the color swatch. Define conditional formatting for the airflow delta ■ In the Conditional Formatting dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Test. select Airflow Delta. right-click to access schedule properties. select red. Double-click the column boundary to expand the column to the width of the text. When you select a field and click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Highlight in Model. 6 On the Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Filter Unplaced or Unenclosed Items panel. and then select Hidden field. select Number. ■ The schedule displays. Select Ascending. and Blank line. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 77 . For Background Color. For Value. notice that the software will test for delta values that are outside the range of -12 to 12 L/s. a view opens that contains the selected space. and click OK. or right-click a column to hide or unhide it. select Level. select Not Between. You format the Airflow Delta field to display as red when the difference between calculated and actual airflow is outside an acceptable range. enter -12 L/s and 12 L/s. Header. For Fields. ■ On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ For Fields. select Level. Click OK twice. In the Color dialog. and you can manipulate the display of columns as with any spreadsheet. and then click Conditional Format.Specify additional schedule properties ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. verify that Show is highlighted.

78 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . all the Actual Supply Airflow values are 0. In this exercise. you begin the designing phase by placing air terminals in the spaces. This concludes the planning stage of the systems project.Because no air terminals have been placed in the model. In the next lesson. the schedule gives a visual indication of the discrepancy. In later exercises. 7 Close the file with or without saving it. and all Airflow Delta fields are red for occupiable spaces. you use the airflow schedule when adding system components to satisfy the required airflow. you created an airflow schedule and defined properties such that when the airflow delta is in an unacceptable range.

you size ductwork and validate your air system design.Designing Mechanical Air Systems 5 Designing air systems in Revit MEP is a straightforward and intuitive process. you will have been introduced to concepts and practices that you will use to design the piping systems. After completing the air systems lesson. you use automatic layout tools and manual placement to create the primary and secondary supply air systems and ductwork to connect the components that you added. Placing Hosted Air Terminals In this exercise. As you place the air terminals. Then. you modify air terminal parameters. and work with the airflow schedule. IMPORTANT It is highly recommended that you complete Designing Mechanical Air Systems before starting Designing Piping Systems. You begin your supply air systems design by placing air terminals in rooms and adding a water source heat pump (WSHP). learn a method to precisely place air terminals into the ceiling plan. 79 . In this lesson. you place air terminals in the ceiling of the rooms. After system creation. you will create supply air systems.

7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. 2 Double-click Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule. Prepare the design views 1 In the Project Browser.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans ➤ Level 2 . 80 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .HVAC Ceiling is highlighted. and then click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 3 In the ceiling view.HVAC Ceiling to make it the active view. zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner. and notice that the space is selected in the plan view as well. click Training Files. indicating that it’s the active view. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. 4 Click in the schedule view to make it active. 5 Select space 223 in the schedule. When you highlight a space using the cursor. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and scroll to space 223.rvt.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Add a supply air terminal 6 Click in Level 2 . and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_01_m. the space crossing lines display. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 18 Repeat to add a third diffuser. Copy the supply diffuser 14 With the diffuser still selected. 15 On the Options Bar. which in this case is the ceiling grid. the Airflow Delta is calculated accordingly.Hosted: Workplane-based Supply Diffuser from the Type Selector drop-down. and press Enter. 17 Move the cursor down. click Place on Face. enter 215 L/s. The schedule updates with the new flow data. Notice that the lounge’s Actual Supply Airflow field in the schedule updates after the terminal is placed. select the diffuser. for Flow. type 3600. If the host element is modified or moved. 11 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. the hosted elements are updated as well. Modify the supply diffuser flow 12 In the ceiling plan. 19 Place 2 additional diffusers as shown. and select M_Supply Diffuser . and press Enter.8 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Element panel. 9 On the Placement panel. 10 Click to place the supply diffuser in the upper left corner of the space. verify that Constrain is cleared. 16 Select the upper left corner of the diffuser as the copy start point. as shown. Multiple allows you to place multiple copies of the diffuser without reactivating the Copy tool after each placement. 13 On the Options Bar. NOTE Hosted air terminals are placed at the height of the host. and then press Esc to end the command. Also. and then select both Copy and Multiple. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 81 .

Place return diffusers 26 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. 25 In the drawing area. you edit the return diffuser family in order to align the diffuser edges to the ceiling grid lines. and then press Esc. select each of the 5 supply diffusers. 21 On the Options Bar. click Place on Face. 82 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . notice that the insertion point snaps the center of each diffuser to a grid intersection instead of centering the diffuser between grid lines. Each diffuser has an airflow capacity of 215 L/s. select one of the diffusers. clear Leader. If alerted that there is no tag loaded for the diffuser object. 27 Select M_Return Diffuser . As you place the return diffusers. click Yes.Hosted : Workplane-based Return Diffuser from the Type Selector drop-down. you load one from the library as follows: 23 In the alert dialog. as shown. 24 In the Open dialog. navigate to Training\Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\M_Diffuser Tag. Next. 29 Place 2 diffusers. and the airflow delta value is within acceptable range. 28 On the Placement tab.Tag diffusers 20 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. and click Open. 22 In the drawing area.rfa.

31 In the alert dialog. and click OK. select Strong Reference.Edit the diffuser family 30 In the drawing area. and click to select the lines. 32 In the Project Browser. select one of the return diffusers. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 83 . for Reference. click Yes. 33 Highlight one of the symbolic lines. under Other. as shown. 35 In the Instance Properties dialog. 34 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Instance Properties. open Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Ref. and click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. Level.

39 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. Align the diffusers in the ceiling grid 38 In the ceiling plan. and then select the top edge of the diffuser. select the vertical grid line as shown. 43 Using the same method. zoom in to the return diffuser at the bottom left of the Lounge. and then press Esc twice. 84 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 40 In the drawing area. 37 In the Family Already Exists dialog. 36 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. as shown. 42 Select the horizontal grid line as shown. 41 Select the right edge of the diffuser. align the other return diffuser.You change the symbolic lines to strong references so that they can be used to align to the lines of the ceiling grid. click Overwrite the existing version and its parameter values.

select both return diffusers. enter 310 L/s. for Flow. you place air terminals in a room that does not have a dropped ceiling. Modify the airflow display arrows 45 Select the return diffuser at the lower left. and on the Options Bar. As you place the air terminals. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals In this exercise. and click OK. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 85 . clear RightArrow and DownArrow for the other return diffuser. right-click. 47 Using the same method.44 While pressing Ctrl. 48 Close the file with or without saving it. and click Element Properties. you modify air terminal parameters and work with the airflow schedule. and press Enter. under Mechanical. 46 In the Instance Properties dialog. clear LeftArrow.

and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. at the lower left corner of the building. 8 In the Type Selector.HVAC Plan . 10 In the drawing area. and then click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. click 1 : 100. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_02_m. the space crossing lines display. 5 Open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule. click Training Files. verify that Tag on Placement is selected.Design to make it the active view. select M_Supply Diffuser . and then click View tab ➤ Windows ➤ Tile. 86 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .Design ➤ Floor Plans. When you highlight a space using the cursor.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 9 On the Options Bar. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal.200 Neck. expand HVAC . 2 On the View Control Bar. click to place the air terminal in the space as shown.Rectangular Face Round Neck : 600x600 . 3 Zoom in to space Instruction 115. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Add non-hosted air terminals 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. for Scale. 6 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. and double-click Level 1 .

Under Mechanical . for Offset. the number assigned to the deleted component will not be used. If you delete a component and subsequently place more of the same component in the same drawing. move the cursor down. type 6000. the diffuser was tagged as it was placed. As a result.Airflow. Also. and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. NOTE The software assigns sequential numbers to components in the order in which they are placed in a drawing. you are also specifying the same offset and flow for the new diffuser. your components may be numbered differently than those in the training files. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 87 . for Flow. Click OK. 15 Press Esc. click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. ■ ■ 13 With the diffuser still selected. 14 Select the bottom left corner of the diffuser. under Constraints.The schedule was automatically updated with the actual supply airflow capacity of the diffuser. By copying the diffuser. and then press Enter. enter 2400. 12 Modify the diffuser properties: ■ In the Instance Properties dialog. enter 170 L/s. Notice that the copied air terminal does not have a tag. 11 Select the diffuser. the offset value is the height of the diffuser from the level. Because non-hosted components are associated with a level.

16 Using the same method. 19 Select each of the untagged diffusers. select both air terminals and copy them 4300mm to the right. clear Leader. and then press Esc. Tag existing diffusers 17 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 18 On the Options Bar. 88 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .

Create an embedded schedule You enhance the schedule by creating an embedded schedule to show data (system type. Type. For Category. 22 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ Select Embedded Schedule. and then click Embedded Schedule Properties. This digital database information source is the integral concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM). Next. and click View Properties. 26 Using the method learned previously. change the flow for 22 and 23 to 155 :L/s. Modify an airflow value in the schedule You use the schedule as a design tool to modify the airflow. select Air Terminals. The schedule is updated and lists the data for individual air terminals in each space. click Edit. 27 In the schedule. select Mark. under Available Fields. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 89 . for Flow. double-click System Type. for Embedded Schedule. 29 Using the same method. because you are modifying the digital database of building information. 20 Double-click the title bar of the Space Airflow Schedule to maximize it. enter 210 L/s. and flow) for individual diffusers in each space. Each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project. 25 Click OK 3 times. and Flow. mark. you modify the airflow capacity of the diffuser in the lower left corner of the space to offset the increased heat gain of the southwesterly exposure. under Other. 23 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. Although the Airflow Delta value is within an acceptable range. 24 On the Sorting/Grouping tab. for Sort by. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. tile the windows. under space 115. Mark. and then right-click in the schedule. type. 28 In the embedded portion of the Space Airflow Schedule. it is a negative value. and press Enter. select 21.

The zone indicator has a line that spans all spaces in the zone. pay attention to the tooltip and the status bar to be sure you’re selecting the zone and not the space.The Airflow Delta value for the space updates to a positive number. as shown. and maximize Level 1 . 31 In the drawing area. 90 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .HVAC Plan . select the zone (2-West-Area T) that includes space 115.Design. As you highlight the zone. Place air handling equipment 30 Close the Space Airflow Schedule.

select M_WSHP .Left Return Right Discharge : 14 kW. 39 Press Esc twice to end the command. 36 In the drawing area. verify that the Calculated Heating Load value is 10955.97 W and the Calculated Cooling Load value is 13531.43 W (approximately 1. 34 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment.High Efficiency . 33 Click OK. and under Energy Analysis. 35 In the Type Selector.32 Open the Instance Properties dialog. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 91 .Horizontal .3 times the heating load). 37 Press Spacebar twice to change the rotation of the pump so that the supply faces the space and the return faces away from the space.7-18 kW . zoom and pan to the double door for space 115. 38 Click to select an insertion point so that the supply is at the approximate center of the doorway.

verify that Design ➤ HVAC . 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 at the upper left of the building. for Constraints ➤ Offset. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses. Verify equipment mounting heights 43 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26. enter . physical connections (ductwork) are not required for systems designing. In the left pane of the Open dialog. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. All of the diffusers (air terminals) that you added are located under default systems categories in the Unassigned folder. 41 In the Instance Properties dialog. they are necessary to perform calculations (such as sizing) that reference the physical geometry. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. 5 Verify that there are no Mechanical systems listed. IMPORTANT Unlike logical connections. In this exercise. You create air systems by placing air terminals and mechanical equipment.Design is highlighted.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_03_m. A Revit MEP system is the logical connection between system components such as air terminals and mechanical equipment. including energy analysis. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. you create low pressure secondary supply air systems. As you add diffusers to systems. 92 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . Create a secondary air system 7 In the drawing area. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. click Training Files. and verify the height of the WSHP:Press Esc. the space crossing lines display.40 Access the instance properties for the heat pump. you then create ductwork to physically connect the system components. After creating the logical connection. and click OK. select the supply diffuser at the upper left of space 223. IMPORTANT In the System Browser.HVAC Plan . and drag it to the bottom of the screen so that it displays horizontally below the floor plan. and click View ➤ Systems. the assigned diffusers move to the respective system folder. Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser. Revit MEP assigned them to the Default Supply Air system. 6 Keep the System Browser open. 42 Press Esc to clear the selection. you also use the System Browser to validate systems. Because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed.rvt. You then create the logical connection between the system components. 45 Close the file with or without saving it. 4 If the System Browser title is Zones. However. 44 Zoom in to space 115. indicating that it’s the active view. When you highlight a space. right-click the title.

the number of elements is updated. and then select the last supply diffuser in space 223. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. 11 In the drawing area. Notice that a mechanical system now displays in the System Browser. NOTE The organization of the Mechanical folder in the System Browser has changed so that the WSHP is the parent. 8 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Supply. 16 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 93 . review the Number of Elements. 19 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Select Equipment. Note that the Flow value (860 L/s) is equal to the sum of the flow values for the 4 diffusers you added to the system. 12 In the System Browser. and the system connects them. and Create Systems) available on the Modify Air Terminals tab. expand Mechanical ➤ Supply Air ➤ Mechanical Supply Air 1. Only mechanical equipment components can be highlighted and selected when you are using the Add To System tool. On the Options Bar. 18 Click OK. 17 Using the method learned previously. 9 Click Modify Duct Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 10 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. System Name. and Flow value. access system properties to see that the flow value (1075 L/s) has updated to include the flow value of the final supply diffuser. the air terminals are the children.Notice that there are layout and system tools (Generate Layout. 15 Click Cancel. select the 3 supply diffusers shown in red and circled. and then select the WSHP (located outside the space). 13 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. Connect Into. These tools vary depending on the equipment used to create a system.

26 Click Finish Editing System. highlight the value (WSHP 2-45) and click Ctrl+C to copy it. 25 Click OK. You used the Create Supply Systems tool to logically connect air terminals to the WSHP. which updates the name in the System Browser. for System Name. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. 27 Close the file with or without saving it. highlight the value and click Ctrl+V to paste over the selection. 22 Click OK. In this exercise. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. under Identity Data. 23 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_04_m. you rename the system to match the identifying data (Mark) of the equipment properties. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog.Rename the system Next. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. you created low pressure secondary supply air systems for the building. 20 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Equipment Properties. for Mark. In this exercise. 94 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . you create ductwork to physically connect system components. click Training Files. The system name is updated from Mechanical Supply Air 1 to WSHP 2-45 in the System Browser. you also use the System Browser to validate systems. under Mechanical.

For Duct Type. select Flex Duct Round : Flex . Select Branch. select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees. the Network type provides several solutions. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. 6 Use the Next Solution and Previous Solution arrows to scroll through the available solutions. for Solution Type. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . each with branches off the main duct at 90-degree angles.HVAC Plan. Also. For Flex Duct Type. 8 In the Duct Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Main. 7 On the Options Bar. and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. Lines indicate the proposed duct layout (blue signifies a main duct line and green signifies a branch). and display solution 1. When you highlight a space using the cursor. A Generate Layout tab displays.Design is highlighted. For Duct Type. indicating that it’s the active view. click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser to display it. 4 In the drawing area. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 95 . For Offset. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner.Round. the software recognizes the system components and sketches a temporary layout path connecting them. the space crossing lines display. 5 On the Options Bar. click Settings. which provides various layout tools. select the upper left diffuser. For Offset. select Network. In this case. enter 3000. 3 If the System Browser isn’t displayed.Add ductwork using the Generate Layout tool 1 In the Project Browser. enter 3000.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees.

10 Select a vertical segment of the main duct. 9 On the Generate Layout panel.■ ■ For Maximum Flex Duct Length. select a different layout solution. If there is not enough room for the software to create the necessary fittings. 96 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . Either relocate the system components. click Modify. a transition connecting the elbow is automatically added. as shown. and use the drag control to drag it to the left. The sketch lines are converted to ductwork. NOTE Errors may occur while attempting to create duct geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. For example. The most common cause of these errors is that the duct usually has insufficient space to be created. as is the elbow itself. Remember to always check duct connectivity after modification. Click OK. or offset elevations are incorrect. WARNING Be careful not to drag the main duct too close to the diffusers. All fittings required to connect the duct system to system components are automatically added. you’ll get an error in a later step. or manually modify the duct. 11 Click Finish Layout. enter 900.

NOTE When multiple ducts and fittings are connected. You can delete ductwork and the system remains. The first time you press Tab. and equipment. you can verify connectivity as you create a system. press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. The ductwork is a physical (not a logical) connection. you can repair the connection by dragging the duct segment end point away from its current connection point and then dragging it back again to reconnect. and click OK. Add a color scheme legend 12 In the drawing area. thus it is not part of the system. 14 Click to the right of the system to place the legend. Press Tab a third time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts. This disconnection will be located at the point where the highlighting stops. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Duct Legend. If the entire network does not highlight. Usually. 15 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. select Duct Color Fill . Using a flow-based color scheme.Flow. Typically the disconnect results from not having enough room between the components that make the connection. and click to select it. Press Tab a second time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts up to the first piece of connected equipment. a disconnection exists. highlight a segment of the main duct. you check connectivity by moving the cursor over a segment of ductwork so that it highlights and then pressing Tab. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 97 .NOTE Notice that the ductwork is not listed in the System Browser. the branch to which the duct is connected highlights. fittings. for Color Scheme.

for Values Displayed. select By View. and click OK. The legend now shows only the color scheme values used in this view. and press Enter. and click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. under Mechanical .Notice that the legend includes all possible values for the color scheme. under Graphics. select one of the diffusers in the system. and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Modify flow values 18 In the drawing area. Notice that the color fill for the connected ductwork has updated. note the Air Flow value (1075 L/s). for Flow. 20 In the drawing area. but not all values are used in this view. and on the Options Bar. and then click OK. decrease the flow value by 50 L/s. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog. 98 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .Airflow. select the WSHP. Modify the legend display 16 Select the color scheme legend. 17 In the Type Properties dialog.

select Duct Color Fill . and select 400. you need to modify the layout: ■ ■ ■ In the warning dialog.Velocity. select Friction. select Calculated Size Only. for Schemes. press Tab 3 times to highlight the entire system (including the WSHP). Select the upper segment of main duct. and then click to select it. Click OK. 24 Click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme.21 Access the instance properties for the WSHP. Select Only. for Branch Sizing. Edit color scheme 23 In the drawing area. and enter . 26 Click OK. 25 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. Select Restrict Height. Under Constraints. 29 In the Duct Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method. Use the velocity-based color scheme as a visual reference to confirm that air is flowing through the system ductwork at the appropriate velocity. If you get an error that there is not enough room to place the required fittings. select the color scheme legend. and then press Esc to clear the selection. 28 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. highlight a segment of the duct. 22 Close the Instance Properties dialog. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 99 . click Cancel. and drag it to the right. Repeat the steps necessary to select the entire system and then size it. and notice that the flow value has updated with the change.65 Pa/m. Calculate duct sizes 27 In the drawing area. The outflow for the WSHP is calculated as the sum of the airflows for all downstream air terminals.

Use the information that displays (flow. you can target problem areas directly in your design and resolve them. 31 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. Ductwork and system components must be connected to a system (logical connection). static pressure. 32 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect. Using this tool. and pressure loss. The selected system components or duct must be logically and physically connected for you to use the System Inspector to inspect airflow and pressure inside ductwork. and a system must contain ductwork (physical connection). pressure. Notice that the ribbon now displays a System Inspector tab. 100 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . The flow information graphically represents the properties of duct systems so that you can easily identify problems with the system. so that you can modify the system design accordingly. Inspect the system The System Inspector is a tool that lets you place the cursor over each system to inspect it for airflow. 33 Move the cursor over the system components. 30 Select one of the ducts in the supply air system. and pressure loss) to find deficiencies in the system.The ductwork and fittings are updated.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. Manually Creating Ductwork In this exercise. click Training Files. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_05_m. 34 Zoom in to various parts of the system and verify that the flow arrows are correct. remember that all information is color-coded according to pressure. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.NOTE As you inspect a system. also known as the critical path. 36 Close the file with or without saving it. you modify existing ductwork and then use the Connect Into tool to connect components to the existing air system. Manually Creating Ductwork | 101 . 35 Click Finish.rvt. You also convert rigid duct into specified lengths of flex duct. Red information and arrows indicate the highest percentage of pressure loss due to friction.

Design is highlighted. 4 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Element panel. indicating that it’s the active view. and select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows / Taps from the Type Selector drop-down.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . and click Draw Duct. and select the WSHP.HVAC Plan . 5 Press Spacebar to make the new duct match the WSHP duct size and location. and click to specify the end of the main duct. 102 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 3 Right-click the supply air connector (the connector facing the room’s double doors). 2 Zoom in to space Instruction 115 in the lower left corner. 6 Click midway between the 2 top diffusers to specify the end of the first segment of the main duct. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 7 Move the cursor to just below the lowest set of diffusers.Manually create main duct line 1 In the Project Browser.

Create branch duct lines 9 To begin branch duct. Connect the remaining diffusers using the Connect Into tool The Connect Into tool is used to add or connect components to an existing air system.8 Press Esc twice to end the command. NOTE When drawing duct.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ Level 1 . 14 In the Project Browser. 15 On the ViewCube. and Left sides converge in order to orient the view as shown. The software accounts for the difference in height from the diffuser connector to the specified offset height. use the connector grip to quickly and accurately locate a connector. 13 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. for Offset.3D MEP. Manually Creating Ductwork | 103 . 12 End the branch by clicking at the intersection of the branch duct and the main duct. and click Draw Duct. Front. select the top right diffuser. click the corner where the Top. enter 3000. right-click the connector grip. double-click MEP . 11 On the Options Bar. 10 Select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows/Taps from the Type Selector drop-down.

and is sized appropriately for the neck size of the diffuser.Click this corner Resulting view orientation 16 Zoom in to space Instruction 115. it is considered a closed loop. Because this branch has 2 end points (the diffuser and the connector into the main duct). select the top unconnected supply diffuser. The ductwork is automatically created. in space 115. 19 In the drawing area. 21 Click the main supply duct to select it as the duct to connect into. 104 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 17 Tile the windows so that you can view results in 3D as you add duct in 2D. 18 Make the floor plan the active view. 20 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into.

A portion of the rigid ductwork is converted to Flex Duct.22 Using the same method. and select the top left diffuser. 25 Press Esc. Branch ductwork in 2D Convert duct to flex duct 23 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Convert to Flex Duct. 24 Select the remaining diffusers. Revit MEP displays a warning that the flex duct that was created exceeds the Maximum Flex Duct setting in the Mechanical Settings dialog. You can ignore the warning. connect the remaining diffusers to the main duct. Branch ductwork in 3D Manually Creating Ductwork | 105 .

29 Click the endpoint snap of the main duct. and then click Modify. zoom in to the open end of the main duct. 27 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Duct Fitting. Endcap in 3D Split and size main duct 31 Maximize the plan view. 28 Select M_Rectangular Duct Endcap : Standard from the Type Selector drop-down.Add an endcap 26 In the plan view. you need to add an endcap to create a closed loop. 33 Click on the main duct below the top set of diffusers as shown. 30 Press Esc twice. 106 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 32 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Split. To ensure that the system has proper flow propagation and accurate system calculations.

under Mechanical . and click OK. This height constraint is used when you place duct in a restricted space. verify that the value is the total of the diffusers supplied by that segment of duct. under Constraints. and click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 39 In the Instance Properties dialog. for Flow. Verify duct sizing 38 In the drawing area. and then click OK. The ductwork is sized to provide appropriate L/s value for the system. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. verify the flow rate for the remaining segments of the main duct. press Tab to highlight the entire main duct run. 37 Press Esc to clear the selection.Size ductwork 34 Highlight a section of the main duct (which is now split).Airflow. select a segment of the main duct. such as a plenum. 35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. and click to select it. Manually Creating Ductwork | 107 . 36 In the Duct Sizing dialog. clear Restrict Height. 40 Using the same method.

108 .

Create return and supply piping systems. you place mechanical equipment. or to bypass the cooling tower during heating mode. In this lesson. Adding Mechanical Equipment In this exercise. using modulating valves to divert through the cooling tower during cooling mode. you create a hydronic piping system that is designed to run in a cooling mode and a heating mode. you create the systems and piping to logically and physically connect the system components. you learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment. Add valves to allow the overall piping system to work in 2 modes: cooling and heating. 109 . This system is modeled to accommodate full system flow through a boiler. Inspect and validate the piping systems and physical connections. You begin the piping system design by placing water source heat pumps and a boiler on level 3 of the building model. Then. including 2 base mounted pumps. and a cooling tower located on the roof. Use the System Browser to review the piping systems. additional water source heat pumps from level 1.Designing a Mechanical Piping System 6 In this lesson. including 2 water source heat pumps (WSHP) and a condensing boiler. Automatically and manually lay out piping. on level 3 of the building model. Use a color-coded display to verify and adjust pipe sizing.

Right Discharge : 18 kW from the Type Selector drop-down.Horizontal High Efficiency . In the left pane of the Open dialog. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_01_m. and select M_WSHP .HVAC Plan . and click to place it in the shorter wing of the building. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. indicating that it’s the active view.rvt. 5 Press Spacebar to rotate the component. in corridor 328.7-18kW .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 110 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .Design is highlighted. 4 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. as shown.Left Return . Adding air side equipment 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Zoom in to the right side of the shorter building wing. click Training Files.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 .

and enter 600. 7 On the Options Bar. and click to place the dimension. 8 Click the corridor wall face. click the dimension. 10 Select the WSHP. Adding Mechanical Equipment | 111 . A tooltip and the status bar (located at the lower left of the window) confirm the space name and number. as shown. 9 Click Place Dimensions tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned. you can identify a space by placing the cursor over the space component. verify that Wall faces is selected.NOTE Although space tags are not included in this view. click the top edge of the WSHP.

as shown. select the 2 WSHPs. 12 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. verify that the WSHP is still selected. (Use the alignment sketch graphics to position the second WSHP the same distance from the corridor wall as the first.) 14 Click Modify. 13 Place another WSHP to the left of the one you just placed. 112 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Modify WSHP parameters 15 While pressing Ctrl.11 Press Enter and then press Esc. and in the Type Selector.

enter 2750. 21 Click Modify.16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. above and to the left of the Base Mounted Pump. 20 Press Spacebar 3 times to rotate the component. and select M_Condensing Boiler : 145 kW from the Type Selector drop-down.75 L/s. enter 0. Under Mechanical. Click OK. as shown. 17 Press Esc to clear the selection. 19 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. Add water side equipment 18 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. for Offset. Adding Mechanical Equipment | 113 . and click to place it in the mechanical room. for Water Flow.

The recommended workflow to create piping systems is to: ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment and other system components. Unlike logical connections (systems). Creating a Piping System In this exercise. Create the logical connection between the system components. Chilled water supply system: 2 WSHPs and a cooling tower 114 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . you create the return and supply piping systems. but without a corresponding system. Create pipes to physically connect the system components.22 Close the file with or without saving it. You can create pipes to connect system components. IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. analyses cannot be performed. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses. and use the System Browser to review and confirm the systems. A system is the logical connection between system components such as water source heat pumps (WSHPs) and a boiler. including flow and pressure. physical connections (pipes) are not required for systems creation.

Assigning a system component to an existing system. right-click the Systems column heading. Equipment that remains in a default system is included in heating and cooling loads calculations. A red dashed line connects the 2 WSHPs in the drawing. In the System Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. click Training Files. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_02_m. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. You assign a system component to a system either by: ■ ■ Creating a logical connection (system) between the system components. This display indicates that the system is selected.HVAC Plan . 5 In the System Browser. Therefore. After you placed the WSHPs and boiler.rvt. where it is easier to review the information. and drag the window down so it displays along the bottom of the screen.Mech 330). This display option allows you to simplify the browser view by showing only the Piping discipline. indicating that it’s the active view. They remain in the Default systems category until you assign them to a system. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy according to the system that you assigned to them. As you assign equipment to systems. Revit MEP immediately assigned them to the Default Hydronic Return and Default Hydronic Supply systems category located in the Unassigned folder. while pressing Ctrl. 6 Expand the Unassigned folder.Design is highlighted.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . leaving a large number of components in a default system can hinder performance and prevent accurate calculations for the systems where they should have been assigned. and expand the Default Hydronic Supply 1 and the Default Hydronic Return 1 systems to view the mechanical equipment placed in the building. 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Return. Creating a Piping System | 115 . Create the hydronic return piping system 7 In the drawing area. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. IMPORTANT All mechanical equipment in the project should be assigned to a system other than a default system. 4 Click the titlebar for the System Browser window. Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . select the 2 WSHPs. and click View ➤ Piping. 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space . the assigned equipment moves from the Unassigned folder to the respective assigned system folder.

select one of the WSHPs that you added to the system to activate this tool and the other options on the Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel.9 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 17 On the Options Bar. 116 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . enter CHWR to represent Chilled Water Return. enter CHWS to represent Chilled Water Supply. 13 Click Finish Editing System. You have created the hydronic return system. 10 On the Options Bar. for System Name. select the boiler. 15 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Supply. (You can click the Piping Systems tab to access the Return System properties. 11 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. for System Name. Create the hydronic supply piping system 14 Select one of the WSHPs that you placed previously. Notice that the Hydronic Return option does not display because the selected component already has a hydronic return system assigned to it. TIP If you clicked outside of the drawing area. and the Edit System tool is not active. Notice that on the Options Bar. 12 In the drawing area. the System Equipment is M_Condensing Boiler: 145 kW.) 16 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System.

In heating mode. 25 Select the boiler. double-click Roof . 21 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building.Design. 19 In the Project Browser. 24 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. 26 Click Finish Editing System. 20 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. and select the cooling tower. the boiler supplies heated water to the system. IMPORTANT The new system named CHWS is now listed in the System Browser under Hydronic Supply ➤ Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. the cooling tower provides cooled water to the system.Design ➤ Floor Plans. and bypasses the cooling tower. the water returns through the boiler into the cooling tower by way of the WSHPs. The boiler is the only equipment that has connectors with compatible system types (hydronic supply and hydronic return). Creating a Piping System | 117 .18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. 22 In the Select Connector dialog. Notice that the Options Bar indicates 3 for the Number of Elements. and select the second WSHP to add it to the supply system. select Connector 1 : Hydronic Supply : Round : 100 mm : Condenser Water Out.HVAC Plan . You select the boiler as equipment for supply to the WSHPs. under Design ➤ HVAC . 23 Close the roof plan view. In cooling mode. and click OK.

You can select the columns that you want to display in the System Browser. 31 In the Column Settings dialog. 30 Right-click the Systems column heading. The hydronic supply system highlights in red. You also manually modify the layout path as required. 33 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click Select. for Water Flow. enter 0. 34 Close the file with or without saving it. right-click the Hydronic Supply system category. and click OK. 118 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . expand the Hydronic Return system category. under Mechanical. You can now view the systems hierarchy: CHWR and CHWS logically connect the boiler (parent) with the WSHPs (children). indicating the logical connection. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout In this exercise. right-click the Flow value for one of the WSHPs in the CHWS system. including the flow rate and size of the component. 32 In the System Browser. The CHWS system contains the 2 WSHPs and the cooling tower. In the System Browser. and click OK. 29 Right-click CHWS. and click Column Settings. you can view several parameters. The CHWS Flow value is updated in the System Browser. select Fluid Type and Fluid Temperature. and click Expand All. expand Piping.8.Confirm and validate the systems 27 In the System Browser. you create the physical connections in the pipe system automatically using the Generate Layout tool. 28 Using the same method. and click Properties.

Design is highlighted. and click OK.HVAC plan view range are highlighted. 5 In the Filter dialog. and the 2 base mounted pumps are selected (and display in red). Create the Level 3 return pipe layout 7 Select a WSHP. The level 3 water source heat pumps (WSHPs). and the selected system components are already connected to more than one system (because they have multiple system connectors). In the left pane of the Open dialog. then the Select a System dialog displays.Mech 330). Notice that all components within the Level 3 . You use an alternate method of selecting the system in the next steps. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_03_m. select Mechanical Equipment. and then click OK to create a layout for the currently selected system. Select components with the Filter tool 1 In the Project Browser. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 119 . the boiler. indicating that it’s the active view.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . 3 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space . TIP Instead of selecting all components and filtering.HVAC Plan .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. You select a system in the dialog to view it in the drawing. and click to select it. When you draw a box to select components. click Check None. 4 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. drag the cursor to the lower right corner to draw a selection box around the floor plan. you can place the cursor over a system component. IMPORTANT If you select system components to create a pipe layout. click Training Files. 2 Beginning outside the building at the upper left corner. you are selecting all components within the view range of the active view. 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. press Tab to highlight the system. 6 Press Esc to clear the selection. A system preview displays in red.rvt.

verify that Solutions is selected. 13 Click Cancel. You can modify this value for the main and branch elevations. 10 Click OK. you can change the pipe type and the vertical offset at which the piping will automatically be created. The perimeter solution creates a layout that runs parallel (along a perimeter) to the connectors of the selected system components. or architectural components. select Perimeter. ■ ■ 120 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. Revit MEP provides several solutions from which to choose. Click (Next Solution) until solution 4 of 5 is selected. 12 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. It does not reference the architecture. 15 On the Options Bar: ■ For Solution Type. structural beams. verify that the Offset value for the Main and for the Branch is 2800. For Inset. IMPORTANT The branch offset lets you automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. click Settings. select CHWR. enter 450. duct.9 In the Select a System dialog. This functionality is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. 11 On the Options Bar. 14 On the Generate Layout tab. The layout path solutions display with the main in blue and the branch in green.

View the Status Bar to verify the branch option currently displayed.16 Click Finish Layout. 17 Optionally. 19 In the drawing area. The piping is automatically created along with the appropriate connectors and fittings so that all of the piping segments are connected to equipment. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 121 . the Status Bar displays the components being highlighted: ■ ■ ■ Branch in a pipe network. 18 Place the cursor over the piping. Branch in a pipe network including the branch objects. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. Branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment. Verify the flow In a previous exercise. With each Tab. the flow for each WSHP is 0. select the pipe connecting the WSHP on the right to the boiler. you modified the flow value for the WSHPs. to display the path with thinner lines. and press Tab 3 times.75 L/s.

22 Select the boiler. under Mechanical. and access its instance properties.75 L/s). 24 Press Esc. 23 Under Mechanical.The flow through this pipe should equal the flow of both WSHPs. 122 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .50 L/s. and click OK. This value indicates the total of the flow for the 2 WSHPs (2 X 0. Add the Level 1 WSHPs to the return system 25 Select the WSHP on the left. and click OK.50 L/s. notice that the Water Flow is 1. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. The flow from the 2 WSHPs travels into the boiler. verify that the value for Flow is 1. 20 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.

click Edit System.Design. 30 Draw a selection window to select the 6 WSHPs.Design ➤ Floor Plans. the Level 1 WSHPs are connected to the chilled water return system (CHWR).HVAC Plan .26 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. On the Options Bar. the Number of Elements is now 8. 28 In the Project Browser. 29 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. 27 On the System Tools panel. and verify that CHWR is selected from the System Selector drop-down. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 123 . and zoom to fit the drawing in the view. 31 Close the Level 1 plan view. double-click Level 1 . under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Logically. 32 Click Finish Editing System.

you physically close the CHWR loop. 124 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . The Level 3 WSHPs generate a flow of 1.94 L/s. under Mechanical. The fittings are automatically created to connect to the return piping coming from below.Physically connect the multi-level WSHPs Previously. 35 Using the drag control. access its instance properties. which propagates flow throughout the system. so the total flow of 6.44 L/s. review the properties for the boiler to verify that the Water Flow value is 6.44 L/s indicates that the flow has propagated correctly. you logically added Level 1 WSHPs to the CHWR System. 34 Select the bottom piece of horizontal pipe. and click Cancel. note that the value for Flow is 4. and then close the Instance Properties dialog. as shown. extend the pipe to the left until it connects to the center line of the existing pipe at the horizontal and nearest snap.94 L/s.50 L/s. 38 Using the same method. Verify the flow from the lower level 36 With the new pipe selected. 33 Zoom in to the piping that comes from the floor below. Next. 37 In the Instance Properties dialog. and the flow coming from Level 1 is 4.

40 In the Select a System dialog. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 125 . 44 Click the boiler to remove it from the layout path solution. In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. NOTE For the purposes of this tutorial. and then click OK.Manually modify piping in layout mode 39 In the drawing area. 42 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Solution Type.00%. and then click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. 41 Click OK. Click Settings. select CHWS. select a WSHP. The inset is the distance from the pipe to the connection on the selected system component. enter 2850 for both the Main Offset and the Branch Offset. For Slope. enter 0. ■ ■ 43 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Remove. select Perimeter 1 of 5. enter 450. the 6 WSHPs from Level 1 have already been added to the chilled water supply system (CHWS). For Inset.

In a later exercise. 48 While pressing Ctrl. The boiler and cooling tower are no longer included in the layout path. select the vertical sketch line just above the one you already selected. select the right vertical green sketch line in the path.45 Click the supply pipe from the cooling tower above. 47 In the drawing area. as shown.) 126 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 46 Click Modify. (Both sections are at the same elevation. you connect the boiler to parallel-connected base mounted pumps.

and drag it to the left (just to the right of the double door in the underlay). as shown. or offset elevations are incorrect. select the short vertical path line connecting the right WSHP (in the same location as the short segment of pipe). NOTE Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. you: ■ ■ Connect the boiler to the return piping. Either relocate the system components. or manually modify the pipe.49 Select the 4-way arrow control. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout In this exercise. Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel to the system. You tile a plan view and a 3D view to simultaneously create the pipe (physical) connections and validate the pipe geometry. 51 Click Finish Layout. select a different layout solution. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 127 . you manually lay out piping to create a closed loop system. and drag it to the right to align it with the sketch lines you just moved. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. 52 Close the file with or without saving it. 50 Using the same method. To create the piping system.

As you work in the training file.Design is highlighted. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. and the return pipes are magenta. Connect the cooling tower into the supply system to maintain the closed loop. Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser. Sometimes (such as during vertical alignment) it’s easier to select components in 3D. 128 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . click Training Files. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_04_m.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . You may find it helpful to view the system in both plan and 3D during design and validation.Design ➤ 3D Views. In the left pane of the Open dialog.HVAC Plan .rvt. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. indicating that it’s the active view. double-click 3D Building. as shown.■ ■ Add piping to close the supply loop. you will notice that the supply pipes are dark purple. NOTE Default color filters for the Hydronic Supply and Hydronic Return have already been specified for this project in the Visibility Graphic Overrides dialog. 2 Under Design ➤ HVAC . 4 Adjust the view in both windows (use the ViewCube and Zoom tools) to see the connections on the boiler.

6 Press Delete. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 129 . draw a selection window around the elbow fitting and the small piece of pipe connecting into the boiler return connector.Modify return piping to accommodate supply piping 5 In the 3D view. as shown. 7 In the plan view. select the section of piping.

10 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. Click to specify the reference point. select the boiler. ■ Move the cursor up 100 mm. 9 In the 3D view.8 Move the piping: ■ ■ Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. ■ Click to move the piping. and press Esc to clear the selection. 130 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . You use this tool on components with connectors to automatically create piping between the component and the existing system. The tool also automatically creates the appropriate fittings.

and click Draw Pipe.11 In the Select Connector dialog. Plan view of return piping connection to the boiler Connect the primary base mounted pump to the boiler Two base mounted pumps are included in the system. and the boiler is connected to the return piping. 13 In the plan view. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 131 . 12 In the 3D view. The connections are automatically created. flow will propagate through the connecting pipe and be assigned to the appropriate system based on the connector to which it is connected. The top base mounted pump in the plan view is primary. select the boiler. and click OK. 14 Right-click the grip that represents the supply connector (top). Using the Connect Into tool ensures that if the connection is successful. click Connector 2 : Hydronic Return : Round : 50 mm : Cold Water In. and the lower one is secondary. select the return pipe riser. An automatic flow valve will be used to direct the flow from the boiler to the 2 pumps.

enter 381. ■ ■ On the Options Bar. and click just before the midway point on the primary base mounted pump. for Offset.In a plan view. enter 600. You can input dimensions as you draw pipe to ensure specific length segments. and select Pipe Types: Standard from the Type Selector drop-down. 15 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. the Select Connector dialog displays prompting you to select the return or the supply connector. 132 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and press Enter. 17 Draw the piping: ■ Move the cursor to the right. if a component has 2 connectors that are not connected to piping. 16 Press Spacebar to acquire offset and pipe diameter values from the connector. ■ Move the cursor down. and you select 1 connector. Add another 600 section of pipe to the right.

select the primary base mounted pump. As you place piping runs that are close together. 18 Press Esc twice. select Connector 1 : Undefined: Round: 80 mm : Water In. Notice in the 3D view that the specified offset dropped the horizontal run down. 22 Select the last segment of pipe you drew. The pipe is automatically connected to the base mounted pump. 19 In the plan view.NOTE The Automatically Connect option attempts to connect piping that is positioned within a specified range. and the appropriate fittings are created. 21 In the Select Connector dialog. and click OK. 20 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. it may be helpful to switch Automatically Connect off to avoid unintended piping connections. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 133 .

you select the tee fitting. right-click the bottom connector. and click the minus symbol. and click to draw the pipe. Connect the secondary base mounted pump 25 Select the tee fitting. 24 Click the bottom plus symbol to upgrade the fitting from an elbow to a tee. as shown. NOTE To downgrade from a tee fitting to an elbow. and click Draw Pipe.Upgrade a fitting 23 Zoom in to the elbow fitting. 26 Move the cursor down until the Status Bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection of the base mounted pump. 134 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and select it.

Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 135 . and when the connector point displays. click to connect to the pump.27 Move the cursor to the right.

31 On the Options Bar. 29 If necessary. right-click the discharge connector. Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel 30 In the plan view. and click to create the pipe. 136 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . for Offset. 32 Move the cursor down until it joins the connector point on the secondary base mounted pump. enter 1200. zoom out in the 3D view to see the new connections. select the primary base mounted pump.28 Press Esc. and click Draw Pipe.

Notice that you do not have to draw the 2 vertical pipes to connect to the pumps. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 137 . these pipe connections were created automatically.33 Press Esc.

Add pipe to create a closed loop system 34 In the 3D view. as shown. select the tee connector in the secondary base mounted pump. zoom in to the elbow fitting on the left (secondary) base mounted pump. upgrade the fitting to a tee connector. 35 Using the method learned previously. 36 Draw pipe to connect the base mounted pipes to the return: ■ In the plan view. 138 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and click Draw Pipe. right-click the bottom control on the tee.

Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 139 . Move the cursor down until the status bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection and vertical with the pipe shown. for Offset. enter 2850. ■ ■ On the Options Bar. type 300.■ Move the cursor down. and press Enter. and click to create the pipe.

37 Click Modify. Next. You now have a closed loop system. 140 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . you validate the flow through the system.

the value is 0 L/s. 48 In the plan view. view the properties for the secondary pump. 46 Press Esc. select the pipe from the secondary base mounted pump to the supply pipe. and click OK. under Mechanical. and click Element Properties. notice that the Flow Factor is a parameter that is . select the cooling tower. 47 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Extend drop-down ➤ Trim/Extend Multiple Elements. When you create the pumps in parallel. 43 Press Esc. notice that Flow is 6. right-click. select the following pipes: ■ Supply pipe.22 L/s (1/2 of 6. right-click. 41 Using the same method. and click Element Properties.44 L/s. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 141 .50 or 50% of the Flow. 44 In the 3D view.Validate flow propagation through the supply system 38 In the plan view. 39 In the Instance Properties dialog. as shown. Flow is not currently passing through the cooling tower because it is not yet connected to the hydronic piping system. Connect the cooling tower Next. In the Instance Properties dialog. for Cooling Water Flow.44 L/s). which is rounded up to 3. under Mechanical. 42 Click OK. The Flow Factor for the primary pump is set to 50% also. 45 In the Instance Properties dialog. The flow is being propagated through the piping. 40 Click Cancel. notice that under Mechanical. you physically connect the cooling tower piping to propagate flow. The cooling tower propagates flow through the inlet and outlet connectors. you can specify the Flow Factors for the 2 pumps as any combination that adds up to 100%.

142 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .■ Upper pipe going to the cooling tower (inlet). ■ Lower pipe (outlet).

select the cooling tower. NOTE Piping colors update based on specified filters. and close the dialog. 50 In the 3D View. 49 Press Esc. and open the Instance Properties dialog to validate that the flow is propagating correctly through the cooling tower.Both pipes for the cooling tower are automatically connected to the piping system.44 L/s. 51 Verify that the value for Cooling Water Flow is 6. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 143 .

3 Click the section of pipe between the supply in and supply out pipes to the cooling tower.Design is highlighted.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_05_m. You add a bypass valve to stop the flow and direct it to the cooling tower (cooling mode). When the valve is open. Place a bypass valve to control flow to the cooling tower 1 In the Project Browser. you add valves to model the piping for 2 modes: cooling mode and heating mode.HVAC Plan . click Training Files.rvt. the water bypasses the cooling tower. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building. indicating that it’s the active view. 144 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Adding Valves In this exercise.52 Close the file with or without saving it. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. and is heated by the boiler. as shown. You also add shut-off valves to control the flow to and from the cooling tower.

4 On the Options Bar. 8 Press Esc twice. and select M_Ball Valve . The bypass valve is closed by default. Rotate the valve 9 Select the valve. NOTE Be careful to select a bypass valve in this step. 7 Click the center of the pipe to place the valve.50-150 mm Bypass : 50 mm from the Type Selector drop-down. and click the top Rotate control to rotate the valve to a horizontal position. verify that the Diameter value is 50 mm. 6 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Element panel. Adding Valves | 145 . 5 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory.

parallel to the previously placed valve. place another M_Ball Valve . 13 Click to place the valve at the midpoint of the supply pipe to the cooling tower. 146 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 12 Select M_Ball Valve .50-150 mm : 100 mm from the Type Selector drop-down. Place shut-off valves 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory.50-150 mm Bypass : 100 mm valve on the return pipe for the cooling tower.10 Press Esc. 14 Using the same method.

Add valves to facilitate a dual mode system 17 Select the small piece of pipe above the bypass valve. and click Element Properties. For the top horizontal pipe (flow to the cooling tower). validate that the Flow is 6. verify that Flow is 0 L/s. under Mechanical. and click OK.15 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 18 In the Instance Properties dialog. Adding Valves | 147 . validate the following flow values: ■ ■ For the pipe below the bypass valve. right-click. validate that the Flow value is 0 L/s. Rotate both valves 16 Click the top Rotate control to the left of each valve to rotate the valve as shown.44 L/s. 19 Using the same method.

Modify valves to bypass the cooling tower Currently the system is designed to run in cooling mode. and select M_Ball Valve . 23 Close the file with or without saving it. (This valve allows the water to flow through it.■ For the bottom horizontal pipe (flow from the cooling tower). In heating mode. and select M_Ball Valve . 148 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . validate that the Flow is 6.50-150 mm : 50 mm from the Type Selector drop-down.44 L/s. The flow traveling through the bypass section of pipe is 6. Initially. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_06_m. You add valves to the cooling tower to enable the system to alternately run in heating mode.44 L/s. you verify automatically calculated pipe size and flow parameters. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. click Training Files. 22 Using the method you just learned. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you want to shut off the flow of water into the cooling tower. validate the following: ■ ■ ■ The flow going into the cooling tower is 0 L/s. You then use a combination of friction and velocity to size the pipes appropriately.50-150 mm Bypass : 100 mm from the Type Selector drop-down. 20 Select the bypass valve. The flow coming out of the cooling tower is 0 L/s.rvt. Sizing Pipe In this exercise. You bypass the cooling tower with hot water coming from the boiler. The color-coded display allows you to quickly see differing sizes and flow of piping. you use the pipe color scheme legend as a color-coded reference to view the flow within the pipes and the sizing.) 21 Select the 2 regular valves (in open position).

Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 .Display the pipe color scheme legend 1 In the Project Browser. 7 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. This display will help you size the pipe using friction and velocity sizing methods. as shown. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Pipe Legend.HVAC Plan . and click OK. 8 Press Esc to clear the selection. for Schemes.Design is highlighted. Display the color fill based on pipe size 6 Select the Color Scheme Legend. 5 Compare the legend to the color coding in the drawing to verify that the flow values are as expected. Sizing Pipe | 149 . indicating that it’s the active view. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . This option displays the pipes in colors based on flow values. and click OK. select Pipe Color Fill . and click Modify Pipe Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. click Pipe Color Fill .Flow. 4 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog.Size. 3 Click to place the color scheme legend in the area to the right of the piping system.

IMPORTANT Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. Click OK. 12 In the Pipe Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method. 10 Move the cursor over the pipe between the primary and secondary base mounted pumps. select a different layout solution. select Larger of Connector and Calculated.5 m/s. for Branch Sizing. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. 13 Press Esc. IMPORTANT The Pipe Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. or offset elevations are incorrect. enter 1. 150 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .Size the pipe using friction and velocity methods 9 Zoom in to the section of pipe connecting the boiler to the parallel base mounted pumps. and for Velocity. select Friction. The piping increases in diameter based on the friction and velocity values specified. Either relocate the system components. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. and click to select the branch. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. Select And. press Tab 3 times (so that the status bar indicates that you’ve highlighted a branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment). Under Constraints. and enter 220 Pa/m. or manually modify the pipe. It does not report the sizing settings of the selected pipe segment or pipe run.

Inspecting the System In this exercise. and pressure loss by placing the cursor over a pipe or mechanical equipment that you assigned to the system. and double-click 3D Building. 3 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. Using the System Inspector. Inspect the system 1 In the Project Browser. you use the System Inspector to inspect the Level 3 hydronic piping system. Inspecting the System | 151 . you can easily detect problem areas in your design and resolve them immediately. 2 Select the section of the return piping (magenta) between the 2 water source heat pumps on the upper level.rvt.14 Close the file with or without saving it. Arrows display on the pipe indicating the flow direction for both the main and the branches in the pipe system. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . click Training Files. The System Inspector lets you inspect each piping system for flow. pressure. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_07_m. The critical flow (indicated by red arrows) is in the main line going to the boiler. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Design ➤ 3D Views. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 4 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect.

as shown. flow. as required. and pressure information including pressure loss. This information helps you modify the system design. 5 Place the cursor over the same section of return piping. NOTE To use the System Inspector to inspect flow and pressure inside pipe.NOTE Zoom in to the piping to see the arrows clearly. Modify fluid temperature 6 Place the cursor over the section of pipe (Section 6) between the 2 WSHPs on the lower level. 152 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . An inspection flag reports the section number. The pipe and the system components must be connected to a system (logical connection) and a system must contain pipe (physical connection). the selected system components and pipe must be logically and physically connected.

11 Close the file with or without saving it. select 32° C. and click OK. targeting those systems that need attention. Perform a systems check 1 In the Project Browser. In this exercise. 9 Using the same method. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. and the Pressure Loss is 7160.HVAC Plan . and double-click Level 3 .0 L/s.Design ➤ Floor Plans. you use the Check Pipe Systems tool to quickly check these connections for all systems throughout your project.7.1 Pa. 10 Click Finish. Checking Piping Systems Revit MEP uses both the pipe geometry and the system to perform calculations such as flow and pressure. and notice that the Static Pressure is 41834. and to size pipe.3 and the Pressure Loss is 7125. the Static Pressure is 41916.Design. Warnings display.4 Pa. In the left pane of the Open dialog. inspect Section 6 again.rvt. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Pipe Systems. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_m. Revit MEP checks both the logical (system) and the physical (pipe) connections of each piping system throughout the project. Because both the logical (system) and physical (pipe) connections play a vital role in the overall systems design.Note that the Flow is 1. for Fluid Temperature. click Training Files. Notice that these warnings indicate that the Default systems are not empty. Checking Piping Systems | 153 . 7 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Properties. you need to validate them. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog.

Revit MEP creates a default system and assigns them to it in order to perform system calculations. The default system is placed in the Unassigned folder until you select the system components and create a system for them. IMPORTANT The most common check systems warning is: default system is not empty. Pipe geometry is used for system flow and pressure calculations. Revit MEP moves them from the Unassigned folder to their assigned systems folder. notice the CHWS (Chilled Water Supply System) is listed. thus assigning the components to a system. Note that only physical connections associated with an assigned system are checked. right-click Hydronic Return.Design floor plan. and for pipe sizing.Design. After you have assigned all components to systems. The dashed red lines represent the logical connection. and click View. This occurs when the assigned system component can be connected to multiple systems (it contains different system connectors). These warnings can refer to both physical connection issues (such as a disconnected or problematic pipe) or logical connection issues (such as an improperly assigned system). you can click Show in the Show Element(s) In View dialog to switch between views. and click Expand All. For example. 8 Expand M_Condensing Boiler: 145 kW. 9 Right-click CHWS. As you learned when placing components. You will check the mechanical piping components to learn how to use the System Browser to confirm specified and default system assignments. and you have not yet assigned the component to the other systems. under which the mechanical equipment that was assigned to the system is listed. 10 Using the same methods. the water source heat pump is listed in the assigned system and assigned to the Default Hydronic Sanitary system in the Unassigned folder.HVAC Plan . Pipe that is associated with a default system (located in the Unassigned folder) is not checked. 5 Verify that Systems and Piping are selected. otherwise. Use the System Browser to confirm piping system assignments 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. Remember that after you create pipe to physically connect a system. Note that a system component may be listed in both its assigned system and in the Unassigned folder. 6 In the Project Browser. the Unassigned folder will be empty and Check Pipe Systems will no longer display not empty warnings. the pipe is associated with that system. but the same component has a sanitary system connector that you have not assigned to a system. 12 In the System Browser. double-click Level 1 . After you assign components to a system. right-click the Systems titlebar. click Close. If you place components without assigning them to a system. you assigned a water source heat pump to a supply hydronic system. and click Show to view all of the system components.Design ➤ Floor Plans. 154 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .HVAC Plan . The return system that you created (CHWR) is listed along with the boiler and the water source heat pumps (WSHPs) that you assigned to this system. expand the Hydronic Supply folder and notice that the M_Condensing Boiler: 145 kW is listed. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . A dialog lets you click Show multiple times for different views. and confirm unassigned system components. TIP If you have multiple views open. 4 In the System Browser. In the System Browser.NOTE The check systems warnings contain a system type and a description. all system components must be assigned to a system after they are placed. expand the Unassigned folder. 7 In the System Browser. and select Level 3 . 11 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Switch Windows drop-down.

15 Close the file with or without saving it. Checking Piping Systems | 155 . confirm the system and the system assignments for the Hydronic Supply system. 14 Using the methods that you learned. and click Select to confirm this system and the assigned system components. You have confirmed and validated both unassigned and assigned system components and their systems.13 Right-click CHWR.

156 .

you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design an electrical system. 157 .Creating an Electrical System In this tutorial.

158 .

Assign space color fills according to required lighting levels. Define required lighting. you complete the planning tasks associated with creating an electrical system. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ Specify electrical settings. Color fill plan with required lighting levels ■ Create a space lighting analysis schedule 159 .Planning an Electrical System 7 In this lesson.

click (Open). For Temperature. speeding up the design phase.rvt. Add a wiring type 3 In the left pane. click Training Files. expand Wiring . enter 70.Wire Sizes. You also add a wiring type. Select Correction Factor. ■ Click New Correction Factor. select Copper. In the left pane of the Open dialog. ■ ■ ■ For Temperature. ■ ■ For Material. enter 1. For Factor. wiring. 4 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ For Name. select Copper. and open Metric\RME_Elec_Planning_01_m. 160 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . select 90. and demand factors that are applied in the design. As you place components and create circuits.Specifying Electrical Settings Electrical settings determine the voltages. Add a correction factor 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. Click OK.04. For Material. 2 In the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. In this exercise you review electrical settings. Revit MEP checks to ensure that components are compatible with the specified voltages and distribution systems. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. distribution systems. select Wiring Types. enter THHN.

The Voltage Definitions table is used to specify a range of voltages that are used with your voltage definitions. select Steel. You can specify demand factors that let you adjust the rating of the main service for the building. 10 In the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Load Classification. select 75. select 120. Specifying Electrical Settings | 161 . Under More Than. For L-L Voltage. select 10000 VA.0. Select 20000 VA and for Demand Factor. enter 250. 8 Click Add and in the Electrical settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. enter 50. enter 1. enter 240. Note the 3 distribution systems listed. enter 2000. Select Neutral Required.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Temperature Rating. For Conduit Type. select Hot Conductor Size. enter 120/240. you allow circuits to be created between components with rated voltages that do not precisely match the voltage definition value. select Single. select Power. Add a distribution system 7 In the left pane. enter 220. For L-G Voltage. Add a voltage definition 5 In the left pane. For Neutral Size. select THHN. For Minimum. Click Split. 6 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. For Value. enter 240. select 240. Click OK. select Voltage Definitions. For Wires. select Demand Factors. For Phase. By specifying a range. select 3. For Maximum. For Neutral Multiplier. For Insulation. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. For Max Size. select Distribution Systems. Specify demand factors 9 In the left pane.

Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. then you create a Key Schedule that links your new parameter to the various types of spaces in your project. select Electrical . In the left pane of the Open dialog. under the Electrical . because the key is linked to your new project parameter. Later in the tutorial. enter Required Lighting Level. restrooms. 2 In the Project Parameters dialog. Under Categories. click (Open). expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting . click Training Files. You begin by adding a new Project Parameter (Required Lighting Level). its value becomes the Required Lighting Level. Then you assign lighting levels to spaces.Next you create a schedule to define required lighting levels. click Add. Click OK twice. Verify that Instance is selected. 162 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . select Spaces. Defining Required Lighting In this exercise. and open Metric\RME_Elec_Planning_02_m. In this case the key style is the type of space and. and double-click Level 2 . The Required Lighting Level project parameter has been added and will appear as an instance parameter for all spaces. Verify the new parameter 4 In the Project Browser. such as offices. 3 In the Parameter Properties dialog. select Electrical.Lighting Plan. 5 In the drawing area. Key schedules provide an efficient way to create an instance parameter that can be used to map specific parameter values to particular key styles.Lighting.Design ➤ Floor Plans. zoom in on the lower left corner and use the crosshair as a guide to select Space 218. Add a project parameter for lighting 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. select Illuminance. For Group Parameter Under. For Type of Parameter. and conference rooms.Lighting group in the space element properties. For Discipline.rvt. you will use the new parameter again to compare the value for Required Lighting Level against the actual illumination provided by fixtures that you place in the plan. you specify the lighting levels that are required for the different spaces within the building. under Parameter Data: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name.

and click OK. and for Key Name. 15 Adjust the column boundaries as needed. enter Lighting Levels. select Spaces. Click OK. under Available Fields. Create a schedule for required lighting levels 8 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. under Electrical . 7 In the Instance Properties dialog. For Name. 14 In the first row of the Required Lighting Level column. 16 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New to add 13 more rows. 17 Complete the table by entering the following: Defining Required Lighting | 163 . note the Required Lighting Level parameter. Click OK. Select Schedule Keys. 11 Double-click the column boundary to the right of each column to adjust the column to fit the text.6 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. enter Space Lighting Requirements. enter Open Office.Lighting. enter 485. 9 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Category. The schedule displays and includes a title and column headings. 13 In the Key Name column of the first row. 10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. double-click Required Lighting Level. Add space lighting requirements to the schedule table 12 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New.

Lighting Plan.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 . 22 Using the same method. Select Blank Line. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Key Name. click Edit. Notice that as you enter the data. 24 Zoom to Space 218 and select the space element. the rows are automatically sorted by Key Name. select Required Lighting Level. 20 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ For Sort By. for Sorting/Grouping. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . change the sort order back to the default setting. which is mapped to project units.The lx value is automatically applied as the parameter is based upon illuminance parameter type. You can change the sort/grouping to sort by Required Lighting Level. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog. 164 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . Change the sort order of the schedule 18 Right-click in the schedule and click View Properties. 21 Click OK twice. Apply a lighting level to spaces 23 In the Project Browser. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Required Lighting Level.

Note that under Electrical-Lighting. you will create a space color fill plan using the lighting levels that you specified in the previous exercise. or edit the Required Lighting Level key schedule for the selected key. Notice that the Required Lighting Level now has a value of 540 lx and the field is dimmed. The schedule includes a calculated lighting delta value. Later in this exercise. that Required Lighting Level is blank. Since Required Lighting Level is an instance parameter. 27 Click OK. select Instruction-Standard. 26 In the Instance Properties dialog. Next you create a color fill scheme for space lighting. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. In this exercise. Space color fills can be used with any parameter that exists for the space components. You can apply a key schedule to multiple spaces at the same time by selecting the spaces and specifying the lighting levels in the Electrical properties dialog.25 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. since the Lighting Level is set to use the value assigned to the Instruction-Standard key value. The only way to change the value is to either select a different Lighting Level key. Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 165 . the value input applies only to the selected space. Space color fill plans and schedules can be helpful as design tools and as design communications documents. Training File ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. which is the difference between the required and the calculated illuminance values. select None for Lighting Level and type a specific value. for Lighting Levels. click (Open). you create a space lighting analysis schedule to aid in the layout of your lighting design. Creating Color Fills and Schedules Revit MEP lets you add color fills to spaces based on specific space parameters. under Identity Data.

00 lx still selected. and press ENTER. enter 900. This command adds a new value based on the split value of the unit you are adding the new value after. for Title.rvt.00 lx. ■ ■ ■ ■ Select the scheme for 400 lx. enter Required Lighting and click OK. 2 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ Under Schemes. then the new value will be 300 lx or half of the difference between the two values you are adding. If you select the value for 200 lx again and click Add. click Training Files. ■ Select the scheme for At Least 200. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ Under Scheme Definition. Under Schemes. 166 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . ■ With the scheme for At Least 200. click (Add Value) again. For Color. Create a color fill legend scheme 1 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Color Schemes. and click (Add Value). enter 800. enter Required Lighting Levels. and open Metric\RME_Elec_Planning_03_m. Select the scheme for At Least 20. click (Duplicate).■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. for Category.00. Select the scheme for 500 lx. Select the scheme for 450. if you select the value for 200 lx and click Add. select Spaces. then the new value will be 400 lx. 3 In the New Color Scheme dialog. ■ Click OK. Continue entering values for the lighting ranges to specify the ranges shown.00. select Required Lighting Level. enter 200. for Name. 5 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ Under Scheme Definition. and click (Add Value) five times. and press ENTER.00 lx. and in the At Least column.00 lx. and press Enter. For example. verify the By Range is selected. and click OK to dismiss the alert message.

select Required Lighting.Lighting CF. For Discipline. 13 Click Calculated Value.Design ➤ Floor Plans. For Type. Name. Average Estimated Illumination. Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 167 . 14 In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. select Illuminance. 8 In the drawing area. Click OK. and Required Lighting Level. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting . For Color Scheme. 7 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. and double-click Level 2 .Add a legend and apply the color scheme 6 In the Project Browser. double-click Number. enter Space Lighting Analysis and click OK. The color fill plan displays the required illuminance levels based on the key values previously created. select Spaces. For Name. enter Lighting Delta. 9 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Space Type. select Electrical. Level. Create a space lighting analysis schedule 10 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 12 In the Schedule Properties dialog. click to place the legend to the right of the drawing. select Spaces. for Available Fields. 11 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ For Category.

Click OK three times. 168 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . select Required Lighting Level. select Average Estimated Illumination. type a hyphen. On the Formatting tab. Click OK.■ For Formula. at the end of Average Estimated Illumination. ■ ■ ■ In the Conditional Formatting dialog. click Browse. ■ In the Calculated Value dialog. Click Conditional Format. ■ ■ In the Fields dialog. Click OK twice. for Formula. for Custom Colors. under Condition. 15 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab. enter -55 lx and 55 lx. ■ ■ In the Fields dialog. select Lighting Delta. For Value. select Red. for Fields. for Test. Click Background Color. and click Browse. Select Blank Line. ■ ■ In the Color dialog. select Not Between. for Sort by. select Level. Select Header. press the spacebar.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 169 . 16 Close the file with or without saving it.The lighting delta values that are not within the conditional value of -55 lx and 55 lx are highlighted in red.

170 .

Create power loads. using the color fill plan and the space analysis schedule as an aid in lighting placement to satisfy required lighting levels. Then. you place lighting fixtures in the drawing. First. as you place lighting fixtures. you modify the color plan to illustrate the space by the Average Estimated Illumination values. Use the System Browser to check your design. and switch systems) by establishing logical connections between electrical components. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Add devices and fixtures using schedule to satisfy required lighting levels. Create circuits (with and without wire) to create the logical connections between devices and fixtures. 171 . power circuits. you create electrical systems (including lighting circuits. These values are based on internal lighting level calculations which use the space floor and wall reflectance values and workplane height to automatically calculate average illuminance or lighting levels.Designing an Electrical System 8 In this lesson. Create a panel schedule. Balance wire sizes and breaker service. you verify illuminance values to indicate when the lighting level requirements have been satisfied. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills In this exercise.

Click OK.rvt. we can quickly identify those areas of the building that do not meet the specified lighting requirements. ■ ■ ■ 5 Click OK.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans and open the Level 2 . You can create additional color schemes. 8 In the Project Browser. 172 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . By using orange as the color for this range. Notice that the Library has an average estimated illumination less than 200 lx. 9 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. for the Spaces Category. 7 In the Project Browser. select the color legend. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ Under Schemes. 3 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. Under Scheme Definition. click (Open). expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . for Basic Colors.Lighting Ceiling plan. click Training Files. select Average Estimated Illumination. expand Schedule/Quantities and open the Space Lighting Analysis view. Modify the color fill plan 1 Verify that the Level 2 . and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_01_m. then modify the color scheme legend to use the color fill plan as a design tool for many tasks. select Orange. 2 In the drawing area.Lighting CF view is open. select the color for Less Than 200 lx. 6 Press ESC to deselect the legend. In the Color dialog.

and the Lighting Delta as red for values out of the +/. which is the lowest value in the specified range. 11 Click the Space Lighting Analysis view to make it active. Add fixtures 14 In the drawing area.Lighting Ceiling Plan view to make it active. The red field will clear once Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 173 . zoom to space Library 219. indicating a value greater than 0 fc. The order of the tiled windows is determined by the order in which the windows were activated. all three of these colored fields will clear to white. with the last activated window appearing in the upper-left corner. the illumination values in the color fill plan and schedule analysis will automatically update. As you add lighting fixtures to the Library. 13 Click the Level 2 . 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. Windows are arranged in a counter-clockwise order.5 fc range specified in the conditional format of this field.10 Click the Level 2 Color Fill_Lighting Plan view to make it active. As you add lighting fixtures to the Library. The schedule indicates the Average Estimated Illumination as yellow for values of 0 fc (conditional format). The color fill plan also indicates in orange an illumination value below 20 fc.

NOTE This option must be selected in order for lighting information to be updated in the color fill plan and schedule. 15 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Lighting Fixture. The colors will coincide with the values in the color fill legend. 19 Press ESC to end the command. 22 In the Instance Properties dialog. The color fill will change colors as lighting fixtures are placed that raise the illumination level above 20 fc. verify that the option for Calculate Coefficient of Utilization is selected. 174 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .the +/. 21 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. the fixtures will move accordingly.5 fc range is satisfied.277V. The Place on Face option allows the fixtures to be hosted by the ceiling plan. 20 Select the lighting fixture. Note that the lighting delta can be cleared.5 fc range. however the color fill plan can display within the range below the specified value because of the +/. 17 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face. so that as the ceiling plan moves vertically. 16 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select M_Recessed Parabolic Light 0600x0600mm(2 Lamp) . In the Space Lighting Analysis view. 18 Click to place the fixture. the lighting delta and average estimated illumination for space Library 219 are updated. All of this works as a visual aid for the designer to insure design requirements are met.

23 Click OK. 24 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 25 On the Options Bar, select Multiple. 26 Use the Copy command to place 2 more fixtures as shown.

NOTE Object snaps are used for selecting intersections of the ceiling grid. 27 Press ESC to end the command. 28 In the drawing area, select the 3 fixtures. 29 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 30 On the Options Bar, select Multiple. 31 Click in the drawing area to place 6 additional groups of fixtures as shown.

Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 175

32 Press ESC. The values in the Space Lighting Analysis view are updated automatically.

33 Click to activate the Schedule window. Notice the value in red for the space Library 219. Modify multiple fixture instances 34 Select the vertical center group of light fixtures.

176 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System

35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select M_Recessed Parabolic Light 0600x1200mm(2 Lamp) - 277V.

Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 177

The values in the schedule are updated automatically.

36 Click to activate the Color Fill_Lighting Plan view. Note the changes for the space Library 219.

178 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System

37 Repeat the previous steps to change the same group of fixtures to M_Recessed Parabolic Light 0600x1200mm (3 Lamp) - 277V. The lighting delta is satisfied.

Note the changes for the space Library 219.

38 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. 39 On the Options Bar, select Multiple Alignment. 40 In the drawing area, click the ceiling grid line as shown.

41 Click the left edge of the first fixture.

Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 179

The fixture aligns.

42 Repeat the previous step to align the remaining fixtures.

180 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System

43 Press ESC to end the command. 44 Close the file with or without saving it. In the next exercise, you modify the light fixture IES files.

Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures
In this exercise, you modify the IES data of the light fixtures with the goal of maximizing the lighting output using the fewest number of fixtures. Training File
■ ■

On the Quick Access toolbar, click

(Open).

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_02_m.rvt.

Create a new lighting fixture type 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 - Lighting CF plan. Expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 - Lighting Plan. Expand Schedules/Quantities and open Space Lighting Analysis. 2 Tile the views as shown.

Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 181

enter 162. In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ Click Duplicate. for Name enter and click OK. ■ Under Electrical Loads. for Apparent Load. Notice the Average Estimated Illumination value of 521 lx.3 In the Space Lighting Analysis schedule view. 5 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 6 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Click Edit Type. 4 In the Level 2 Lighting Plan view. In the Name dialog.00 VA. 182 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . scroll to view space space Library 219. zoom to space Library 219 and select the lighting fixture shown.

click the value for Light Loss Factor. ■ Click OK twice. ■ In the Initial Color dialog. enter .■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. for Ballast Loss Factor. ■ ■ ■ In the Light Loss Factor dialog. Click OK. Notice that the lighting delta for the Library has been updated again. click the value for Initial Color. for Color Preset. for Type Mark. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. select Luminous Flux. ■ Click Apply. Under Photometrics.rvt. Junction Boxes. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 9 In space Library 219. 11 Click Match Fixtures tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Initial Intensity dialog. The procedure for placing switches and receptacles is the same as for placing any hosted components in Revit MEP. Placing Switches. Notice that in the Space Lighting Analysis Schedule. Apply the fixture type to other fixtures 8 Click Modify tab ➤ Clipboard panel ➤ Match Type. Place lighting switches 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. Under Photometrics. ■ Under Photometrics. In the Select File dialog. select the top center fixture. 10 Click the other fixtures in the center to apply the fixture type. 12 Close the file with or without saving it. and Receptacles In this exercise you add switches for the lighting switches and the receptacles in your project. click (Open). Placing Switches. Under Electrical. click the value for Photometric Web File and click Browse. Junction Boxes. you add switches. enter F15. select T5 [HO].00 lm. click Training Files. select 463T5_S. click the value for Initial Intensity. specify 15000. the Lighting Delta for the Library is updated.85. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_03_m. select Xenon and click OK. and click OK. for Lamp. Under Photometrics. junction boxes.93. 2 In the drawing area. and Receptacles | 183 . Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. For Luminaire Dirt Depreciation. enter .ies and click Open. and receptacles to your design. 7 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. In the next exercise.

Regular Voltage: Passive Infrared . Because the switch requires a wall to serve as the host.3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting. 7 Click to place the switch. 6 Position the switch on the interior wall as shown. 5 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Placement tab ➤ Place on Vertical Face. 4 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select M_Wall Occupancy Sensor . 184 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .277V. it is only previewed when the cursor is over a wall.

9 Press ESC to end the command.8 Place a second switch of the same type on the other side of the wall as shown. Select M_Junction Boxes .NoLoad: 100 Square is selected in the Type Selector. Placing Switches. Place junction boxes 10 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. and Receptacles | 185 .rfa and click Open. Junction Boxes. 13 Position the junction box in space Computer Lab 222 as shown. 12 In the Load Family dialog. The element type M_Junction Boxes . browse to Revit MEP ➤ Metric Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ Power Devices. 11 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family.NoLoad.

21 In the drawing area. 16 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Under Electrical. In the Type Properties dialog.Offset.14 Press ESC to end the command. NOTE When entering values. 17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Under Constraints. enter JB-1NL. 186 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . note that Apparent Load is set to 0. Click OK twice.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 Power Plan view. Place wall-hosted receptacles 19 In the Project Browser. for Level 2 . note the Number of Poles is 1. Click Edit Type. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Power . ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. 20 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden to close other views that may be open. 18 Press ESC to deselect the junction box. zoom to space Library 219. you can enter a space to separate the unit values. enter 2750. 15 Select the junction box. for Mark.

Click OK.22 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. Placing Switches. Right-click the column heading again and click View ➤ Electrical. 23 In the System Browser. Note that the values for the space Library 219 are currently blank. expand Unassigned and scroll space Library 219. and Voltage. and Receptacles | 187 . NOTE If necessary. Expand Electrical. Space Name. Select Size. right-click the a column heading and click View ➤ Systems. This list displays components that have not been assigned to a circuit. dock the System Browser at the bottom of your window. Expand General. Junction Boxes. Select Load. 26 In the System Browser. Space Number. Distribution System. 25 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Check None. 24 For any column. and Number of Elements. right-click and click Column Settings.

27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 31 Close the System Browser. 30 Scroll the System Browser to see the added receptacles. 188 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 28 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select M_Duplex Receptacle: Standard. 35 Select the dimension and enter 3650. 34 Drag the grip to move the witness line to the receptacle on the left as shown. 29 Click to place 2 receptacles in space Library 219 as shown. Reposition the receptacle 32 Select the receptacle on the right. 33 Position the cursor on the Move Witness Line grip as shown.

36 Press ESC to deselect the receptacle. and Receptacles | 189 . Placing Switches. move the cursor along the wall.The receptacle on the right is repositioned according to the dimension you enter. 41 Click the midpoint of the receptacle. Junction Boxes. and enter 3650 and press ENTER. 38 Select the receptacle. 39 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. select Copy and Multiple. Place additional receptacles 37 Repeat the previous steps to place a third receptacle in space Library 219 as shown. 40 On the Options Bar.

enter 3650 and press ENTER to place another receptacle. 190 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .42 Move the cursor down. 43 Press ESC to end the command.

46 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face. and Receptacles | 191 . 45 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select M_Duplex Receptacle: Standard. Placing Switches.Place floor-hosted receptacles 44 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. Junction Boxes. 47 Click to place 3 floor receptacles as shown.

Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire In this exercise you add the electrical equipment for the distribution systems in your plan.48 Close the file with or without saving it. Next you create lighting circuits and show wire. The following diagram shows the connectivity for your electrical 192 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . you need to create logical connections to define the topology. Although the connections between this type of equipment are not typically shown on plans.

4 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select M_Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . You start at the low voltage panels (L-1 and L-2). and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_04_m. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 193 . In the left pane of the Open dialog.Surface: 100A. zoom to the space Electrical 220. In this exercise you also become more familiar with the wiring settings.equipment. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. then create lighting circuitry and add wiring as the circuits are created. Adding wiring to a project is optional.rvt. 2 In the drawing area. click Training Files. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Electrical Equipment.208V MCB . click (Open). Add panelboards 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open. main distribution panels (H-2 and MDP). and work toward the higher voltage.

for Max. For Panel Name. Note that Apparent Load Phases are dimmed because they are calculated values. 17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . for Distribution System.5 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Placement Panel ➤ Place on Vertical Face. #1 Pole Breakers. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.Loads.Surface: 100A panelboard as shown. Click OK. 15 On the Options Bar. Click OK. 194 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 10 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 12 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard. 8 Select the panelboard. For Panel Name. 7 Press ESC to end the command. enter 20. for Distribution System. select 480/277 Wye.Loads. 13 Repeat the previous steps to place a M_Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . for Max. 11 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Electrical . 14 Select the panelboard. enter LP-2B. 6 Click to place the panelboard as shown. #1 Pole Breakers.480V MCB . enter PP-2B. select 120/208 Wye. 9 On the Options Bar. enter 20. ■ 18 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard.

zoom to space Instruction 221. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting .Add a circuit with wire 19 In the Project Browser. 24 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 195 . 22 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. and for Category. The blue sketch graphics show the created circuit. which is the logical connection between the elements. Click OK. 21 Select all fixtures and switches in the space.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 Lighting Plan view. 20 In the drawing area. click Check None. 23 In the Filter dialog. select Lighting Devices and Lighting Fixtures.

196 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 26 Select lighting panel LP-2B. The red sketch graphics show the logical circuit with the home run pointing toward the selected panel.25 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel.

Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 197 . Add a switch 29 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting.27 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. 28 Press ESC to end the command. 30 Click Lighting Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select M_Lighting Switches Three Way.

198 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 34 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel and select M_Lighting Switches : Three Way from the Type Selector drop-down. 33 Select the switch on the right. 32 Press ESC.31 Click to place the switch in the drawing area as shown.

38 Press ESC to end the command.35 Select the left three-way switch. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 199 . 37 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. 36 Click the top-left lighting fixture to add to the circuit. right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit.

2 In the drawing area. click (Open). and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_05_m. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire This exercise is similar to the previous exercise in that you create circuits. Next you create circuits without showing wire. enter 2.39 Using the same method. Notice that the tick marks are updated to show 4. for Hot Conductors. and for Category. 41 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. Click OK. add the other 3-way switch to the lighting circuit. 45 Close the file with or without saving it. and create permanent wiring. except without wire. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. 44 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 40 Select all items in space Instruction 221. click Check None. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. Add a circuit without wire 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. select Wires. Click OK. 200 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . click Training Files. 43 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.Loads. 42 In the Filter dialog.rvt.

9 Select panel LP-2B in space Electrical 220. Click OK. 13 In the System Browser. and then expand circuit 1. 5 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. expand Power. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. and verify that Load. Voltage. 17 Scroll down and expand LP-2B. right-click on the Systems heading. 6 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. Notice the circuit in space Instruction 221. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 201 . 15 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ Expand General and review the settings. 8 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Select Panel.4 Right-click the connector and click Create Power Circuit. Expand Electrical. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right and the lighting sensor. ■ 16 In the System Browser. Check circuits 11 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. and click View ➤ Systems and Electrical. Rating. Distribution System. 12 Move the System Browser pane to the bottom of the screen for easier viewing. 14 Right-click on the Systems heading and click Column Settings. and Voltage Drop are selected.

Click Tags. View circuit information 24 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. 20 Select the junction box and click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 28 Select one of the occupancy sensors. right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. under Electrical. 23 Move the cursor over one of the adjacent fixtures and click to select it. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. 202 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 26 Select the 4 remaining lighting fixtures and the other occupancy sensor in space Computer Lab 222. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to a panel. 22 With the junction box still selected. 30 Close the System Browser. change the Voltage to 277V. 27 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 25 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit.18 Expand circuit 2 and note the devices. Click OK. Notice the addition of the junction box to circuit 2 in the System Browser. 32 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Deselect Leader. 29 Move the cursor over one of the fixtures and press TAB 3 times to view the circuit. Add tags to fixtures 31 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. Add additional devices to the circuit 19 In the drawing area.

Click Apply and note the label parameters are divided into 2 lines in the drawing area. 37 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Edit tags 42 Select a tag and click Modify Lighting Fixture Tags tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 203 . select Break. For Circuit Number. 38 In the Instance Properties dialog. click below the first one to place it. select Circuit Number and Switch ID and click Add parameter(s) to label . Notice that all 6 lighting fixture tags are updated. 47 In the drawing area. 45 Click Modify Label tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. 44 In the Edit Label dialog. 40 Click OK twice.33 In the Tags dialog: ■ ■ For Lighting Fixtures. 35 Press ESC to end the command. 46 Click Place Label tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal ➤ Center and and click Vertical ➤ Top. Click OK. 48 In the Edit Label dialog: ■ Under Category Parameters. 39 In the Type Properties dialog. ■ ■ ■ Select Wrap between parameters only. under Identity Data. Click Yes. notice the label parameters and click Cancel. enter FR4. 43 Select the label name and click Modify Label tab ➤ Label panel ➤ Edit Label. select M_Lighting Fixture Circuit Tag : m_Standard. 34 Click each of the 6 lighting fixtures in space Computer Lab 222. 41 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. click Edit Type. for Type Mark. 36 Select the upper-left fixture.

50 Drag the handle on the right side of the tag to resize it by dragging it to the left.rfa. 60 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. Note the tags are updated in the drawing area. and click Apply. 52 In the Save As dialog. 58 Click Modify Lighting Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ and select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard.■ ■ Deselect Break and for Suffix. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Notice the tags are updated in the drawing area. select Lighting Fixture Tags. Next you create a switch system. 56 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. and for Category. 62 Close the file with or without saving it. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_06_m. click Check None. 204 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Creating a Switch System In this exercise you learn how to create a switch system. Add tags to remaining fixtures 55 Select all the elements in space Computer Lab 222. click (Open). and select M_Lighting Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag. Click Save. 57 In the Filter dialog. Click OK. 51 Click ➤ Save As ➤ Family. Click OK. enter a comma. 54 Select all of the tags. enter M_Lighting Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag. 61 Zoom out to see the tagged fixtures. select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard and click Apply. for File Name. click Modify Lighting Fixture Tags ➤ Element Panel ➤ drop-down. 53 Click Create tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project.rvt. Click OK. 59 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. 49 Click Place Label tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command.

Click OK. under Electrical Lighting. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right of the space. for Switch ID. 9 Select the occupancy sensor. 13 Click Modify Lighting Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Creating a Switch System | 205 . 11 Highlight the fixture and press TAB 4 times to see the switch system. 8 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch. 5 Click Modify Switch System tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. 2 In the drawing area. enter a. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. 12 Select the occupancy sensor.Create a switch system 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. Notice that the lighting fixture tags for the two fixtures are updated with the Switch ID. 4 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. 10 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System. 6 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System.

19 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. Notice the lighting fixture tags for the 4 fixtures below the wall are updated with the switch ID. for switch ID. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. enter b. 23 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Switch Properties. 16 Select one of the lighting fixtures below the wall. 17 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch. 20 Select the remaining 3 lighting fixtures. 21 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch. 25 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System. Click OK.Lighting. 22 Select the occupancy sensor on the bottom side of the wall. 18 Click Modify Switch Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System.15 Press ESC to deselect the occupancy sensor. 206 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . under Electrical .

26 Close the file with or without saving it.Loads. Add a circuit 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open. 5 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. for Hot Conductors. 12 Press ESC to deselect the wire. Next you create a circuit and size wire. 2 In the drawing area. select Electrical Fixtures. Creating Power Loads | 207 . 10 Right-click the wire for the home run to the panel. enter 2. 11 In the Instance Properties dialog. click Check None. and for Category. click (Open). Click OK. under Electrical . Creating Power Loads In this exercise you will learn methods for creating power circuits (circuit groups). and data systems. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_07_m. 9 Press ESC to deselect the wires. 4 In the Filter dialog. zoom to space Instruction 221 and draw a selection box to select all the components in the space. Circuits are used for power. 8 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. The concept of grouping similar functions into systems is used to show logical connections between different components in the system. Click OK. and click Element Properties.rvt. lighting. 3 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 6 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. select the PP-2B panel. 7 In space Electrical 220. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Notice the 3 tick marks is changed to 4 tickmarks. click Training Files.

press Tab to display a preview of the circuit wiring. The tick mark for all ground conductors are changed to a hooked tick marks and neutral conductors display as a long tick mark.rfa. and in the right pane. select Wiring. and click Open. navigate to Metric Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks. click the minus symbol to delete a tick mark. and click to select the circuit. 18 For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. 19 Click OK. select M_ Hook Wire Tick Mark. select M_Hook Wire Tick Mark. 15 In the Load Family dialog.13 Select the wire again. select M_ Long Wire Tick Mark. 208 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . for Ground Wire Tick Mark. Combine multiple homeruns into a multi-circuit homerun 20 Highlight one of the receptacles in space Computer Lab 222. 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. 14 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. and in the drawing area. 17 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog.

in space Instruction 221. 28 In the drawing area.21 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. and the connector on the nearest receptacle in space Computer Lab 222. click a point halfway between the first and second receptacle to create an arc. click the connector of the first receptacle. select the PP-2B panel. Creating Power Loads | 209 . 27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Wire drop-down ➤ Arc. 29 In space Instruction 221. as shown. 23 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. 24 Press ESC to deselect the wires. as shown. add another wire between the connector on the last receptacle in 221. 26 Press Delete. 22 In space Electrical 220. 25 Select the homerun from space Computer Lab 222 and the wire between the first and second receptacle in space Instruction 221. and then click the connector of the second receptacle as shown.

Next you balance the loads for your design. An additional hot conductor is added to the 221 wiring.Notice that there are now 4 tick marks on the homerun and the wiring for space Instruction 221 and a double arrowhead to indicate the multi-circuit homeruns. Notice the triple arrowhead for the homerun. and connect its wiring to a receptacle in space Instruction 221. 210 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 31 Close the file with or without saving it. There are only 3 tick marks on the wiring that extends to the space Computer Lab 222. 30 Add wiring to space Electrical 220.

click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Circuit Properties. zoom to space Electrical 220. This will reduce neutral current as well as prevent an excess voltage drop due to one phase being overloaded. but the overall load on the three phases remains the same. Verify and adjust wire sizes 7 With panel LP-2B still selected.rvt. After re-balancing loads. 1-#10. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select panel LP-2B. then you examine the loads presented at the panels to set your final breaker sizes. 5 In the Edit Circuits dialog. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit: ■ ■ Scroll down and note the current value for the Wire Size parameter is 3-#12. click Rebalance Loads. 1-#12. Scroll down. Click OK. Balance circuit loads 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. 3 In the Electrical space. the loads would have been moved to different circuits to achieve better balance. 4 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Circuits. 2 In the drawing area. Revit MEP automatically calculates wire sizes based on circuit rating.Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service In this exercise you begin by balancing the loads at the Level 1 and Level 2 panels. 6 Click OK. Under Electrical-Loads. Balancing loads begins with adjusting the loads at the panels farthest from the power source. Finally. and note the value for the Wire Size parameter is now 3-#10. 1-#10. the distribution is shifted. Circuit loads should be balanced to present as nearly as possible an equal load to each phase. click Open. for Rating. 1-#12. ■ ■ Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service | 211 . Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. you verify and adjust wire sizes that Revit MEP recommends for handling the loads on those circuits. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_08_m. Had there been a greater imbalance. enter 30A. click Training Files.

and click OK. 22 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. 13 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. select the transformer TP-2B. 15 Select panel PP-2B.Loads. 24 Click Select Panel. under Electrical .Adjust circuit breaker sizes 9 Select panel PP-2B. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. 17 Close the warning dialog. 14 Close the warning dialog. Panel PP-2B is now reconnected to transformer TP-2B. enter 40A. The circuit breaker size for panel PP-2B is now sized to handle the connected load. 20 Click OK to close the warning dialog. enter 25A. for Rating.Loads. 25 Press ESC to deselect the panel. 10 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. 21 With panel PP-2B still selected. A warning indicates that the total connected load exceeds 80% of the defined value of 20A for the circuit you are creating. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. for Rating. 18 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. A warning indicates that the power system is empty and will be deleted. 23 With panel PP-2B still selected. 12 Select panel PP-2B. Next you create a panel schedule. and click Finish Editing Circuit. 11 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Remove from Circuit. and click OK. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. under Electrical . click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 212 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. 4 Close the report. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports and Schedules panel ➤ Panel Schedule. You also learn to use the Check Circuits tool to verify that all of the circuits in your plan are connected. under Reports ➤ Panel Schedule.Creating a Panel Schedule In this exercise. Under Header Text. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. 7 With the panel schedule selected on the sheet. select Berlin Sans FB. for Font Size. 9 In the Panel Report Appearance dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Header Text. for Font. 6 In the Project Browser. enter 4 mm.rvt. click Training Files. the panel will not appear in the Select Panels dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select Bold and Italic. you create a panel schedule report for panelboard MDP-1. Select PP-2B. enter 5 mm. 5 In the Project Browser. under Other. and open E601 . click Edit. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. Click OK. Creating a Panel Schedule | 213 . expand Sheets (all). for Font Size. click Modify Schedule Graphics tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. Checking Your Design In this exercise you learn how to use the System Browser to examine the circuitry that you created in previous exercises. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_09_m. 3 In the Select Panels dialog: ■ ■ ■ Click Clear Selection. click (Open). This dialog allows you to control how the panel schedule report displays when it is included on a sheet. NOTE If a panel schedule has already been created for a panel.Panel Schedules. The Panel Schedule Report displays. 10 Click OK twice. Create the panel schedule report 1 Verify that the Level 1 Power Plan is open. for Appearance. Under Header Text. Under Body Text. The Panel Report Appearance dialog displays. drag PP-2B onto the sheet. Next you use the System Browser to check your design.

2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. each with a load of 180VA. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. 7 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the lower wall and press TAB once. click Training Files. View unassigned components 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. 9 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. and then click the receptacle to select the circuit. and click AutoFit All Columns to resize the columns in the System Browser. select space Lounge 212. 11 Select the receptacle on the lower wall. 6 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the bottom wall and press TAB once. 3 Move the System Browser to the bottom of the drawing area. ■ ■ 5 In the drawing area.rvt. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add to Circuit. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to panel PP-2C. In the System Browser.Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Expand Unassigned. Notice the receptacle in space Lounge 212. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_10_m. Notice that the receptacle on the lower wall is not connected to circuit 1. Expand Power ➤ PP-2C ➤ circuit 1. notice that the receptacle is not connected to any circuit. There are 9 devices connected to circuit 1. click (Open). 214 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 8 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the right side wall. press TAB once. 4 In the System Browser: ■ Right-click a column heading.

12 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 21 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 16 Close the details dialog. notice that PP-2C for circuit 1 is updated. zoom to space Electrical 214. click (Expand warning dialog) to view details of the warning. Panel LP-2C is now connected to the main distribution panel MDP-1. for Panel. 22 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 15 In the dialog. Check circuits 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Circuits. under Warnings. 19 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Systems Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. expand the warning category for Circuit is not assigned to a panel ➤ Warning 2. 17 In the drawing area. 18 Select panel LP-2C. In the System Browser. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. Notice that panel LP-2C is not connected. Checking Your Design | 215 . select MDP-1. 20 On the Options Bar. 14 In the warning window that is displayed indicating an unconnected power connector.

216 .

217 . you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a plumbing system.Creating a Plumbing System In this tutorial.

218 .

Vent. and specify the default fittings that will be used with this type.Plumbing Plan . type PVC . right-click PVC . In this lesson. and verify that Level 1 . Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System Revit MEP provides families of common plumbing components that you place in your plumbing plan.Sanitary.Planning a Plumbing System 9 Creating plumbing systems in Revit MEP is similar to any design project. and click OK. Loading pipe fittings required by the plumbing system. and open Metric\04_Plumbing\RME_Plumb_Planning_01_m.rvt. Adding a pipe size. click Training Files. Specifying default sanitary piping settings for the main and branch piping. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. planning is critical to a successful design. In this exercise. and click Properties. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.Design ➤ Floor Plans. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You load the families of components that are required for your plumbing systems. 4 In the Name dialog. 3 In the Type Properties dialog. click Duplicate. 219 . you create a PVC pipe type.Design is open. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser. you prepare to design the plumbing system by: ■ ■ ■ ■ Creating a PVC Sanitary Pipe type. in addition to loading existing families. 2 In the Project Browser.

and click Main. 26 Click OK.Sch 40 . click Training Files. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. select None.293 mm.006 mm. for Pipe Connector Tolerance. and open Metric\M_Trap P .000 mm. 9 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. Cross. verify that Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing are selected. Specify sanitary piping settings 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ . 14 Expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. 220 | Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . 21 In the right pane. select Sanitary. for: ■ ■ ■ ■ Preferred Junction Type. 16 Specify settings for the Main sanitary piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. under Pipe Types. 25 For Outside.DWV: Standard. enter 45. for Material.Sch 40 . Tee. click Pipe Settings. for Nominal. 8 Click Place Pipe Fitting tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family. select Branch. and click OK. select Pipe Types: PVC Sanitary. NOTE For additional information on the Mechanical Settings. 19 Specify the same settings for the Branch sanitary piping as you used for the Main. select Plastic. under Mechanical. DWV represents Domestic Waste Vent. enter 10°. Load piping component families 7 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. select Sanitary. 6 Click OK. PVC . select M_Tee Sanitary . 13 In the right panel.Vent is listed.DWV. enter -1250.PVC .DWV: Standard.rfa.PVC . Add a pipe size 20 In the left pane. 18 For System Type.PVC . 27 For the new pipe size. 15 For System Type. enter 54.Sch 40 . 12 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. select Pipe Settings ➤ Sizes. The new pipe type is listed in the Project Browser under Families ➤ Pipe Fittings. enter 46. In the Project Browser. 22 Click New Size. Tap.5 In the Type Properties dialog. 17 In the left pane. 24 For Inside Diameter. click Modify. For Offset. select Tee. refer to Revit MEP Online Help. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. 10 On the Selection panel. 23 In the Add Pipe Size dialog. select M_Cross Reducing Double Vent .

including plumbing fixtures. Create the cold water system.Designing a Plumbing System 10 In this lesson. you design the plumbing system for the Level 1 men’s room in a commercial building. Create the hot water system. and add piping to physically connect the fixtures to the system. Create piping to connect sinks to the sanitary system. vent. sanitary piping. add a hot water heater. 221 . and create piping to physically connect the sinks to the hot water system. and hot and cold water piping. Add a sanitary and vent stack to the system. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place sanitary plumbing fixtures. Create the sanitary plumbing system.

Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures
In this exercise, you add 2 toilets, 1 urinal, and a floor drain to the level 1 men’s room. You place 3 sinks in a later exercise.

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_01_m.rvt.

Place wall-mounted toilets 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and verify that Level 1 - Plumbing Plan - Design is open. 2 Zoom in to the bottom middle area of the floor plan, including the men’s room (space Male 107), as shown. NOTE To identify a space name and number, move the cursor over a space and refer to the tooltip or the Status Bar for information.

222 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

The men's room is partitioned for 2 toilet stalls, 1 wall-mounted urinal, and 3 sinks. Reference lines are included in the plan view to make it easier to place components.

3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture. 4 On the Element panel, in the Type Selector, under M_Water Closet - Flush Valve - Wall Mounted, select Public - Flushing Greater than 6.1 Lpf. 5 On the Placement panel, verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected. 6 Click to place a toilet in the accessible toilet space, against the left wall, centered on the bottom horizontal reference line, as shown.

Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 223

7 Click to place another toilet, above the first in the standard toilet space. (Again, use the reference line to center the fixture.) 8 Press Esc.

Place a wall-mounted urinal 9 In the Type Selector, under M_Urinal - Wall Hung, select 20mm Flush Valve. 10 Click to place the urinal in the space above the 2 toilet spaces, and press Esc. NOTE If it is difficult to align the urinal to the reference line, zoom in closer.

224 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

Place a floor drain 11 In the Type Selector, under M_Floor Drain - Rectangular, select 125 mmx125 mm Strainer 50mm Drain. 12 On the Placement panel, click Place on Face. In placing the fixture, you select the floor as the face because this is a floor mounted drain. 13 Click to place the drain above and to the right of the accessible toilet (at approximately 200 mm and 200 mm from the intersection of the reference lines for the 2 toilet areas).

14 Click Modify.

Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 225

Open the System Browser 15 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 16 Click the title bar for the browser, and dock it by dragging it to the bottom of the drawing area. 17 If zones are displayed, right-click in the System Browser table heading, and click View ➤ Systems. 18 If all disciplines are displayed, right-click in the System Browser table heading, and click View ➤ Piping. 19 Expand the Unassigned folder, and notice that there are 2 default systems: Default Sanitary, and Default Domestic Cold Water. The default systems contain the fixtures that you placed. The fixtures are included in the default system based on the connectors included with the components (sanitary connectors and cold water connectors). 20 Expand Default Sanitary, and review the components listed under this system. 21 Expand the Default Domestic Cold Water folder, and notice that the drain is not included because it does not have a cold water connector. 22 Close the file with or without saving it.

Creating a Sanitary System
This is the first of 3 exercises that guide you through creating the piping for the men’s room sanitary plumbing system. In this exercise, you create a sanitary system consisting of the toilets, a urinal, and a floor drain. You then use Revit MEP’s Layout Path tools to create sloped piping to connect the fixtures to a sanitary outlet.

Training File

Click

➤ Open.

226 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_02_m.rvt.

Create the sanitary plumbing system 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and verify that Level 1 - Plumbing Plan - Design is open. 2 In the Project Browser, open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing - Overall. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 4 Zoom in to the plumbing fixtures in both views. 5 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser, and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen. 6 In the plan view, starting in the lower left and moving to the upper right corner, draw a selection box around the fixtures in the men's room.

7 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 8 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Plumbing Fixtures, and click OK. Only plumbing fixtures are selected.

Creating a Sanitary System | 227

9 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Sanitary. The fixtures you selected all have sanitary connectors, so the Create Sanitary System is available. All of the fixtures except for the drain also have cold water connectors. If you deselected the drain, the Create Cold Water System option would also be available.

10 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 11 On the Options Bar, for System Name, enter Sanitary 107. You include the bathroom space number in the name. 12 On the Edit System panel, click Finish Editing System. 13 In the Systems Browser, expand Sanitary, and notice that Sanitary 107 is listed. The components that were listed under the default system are now included in the Sanitary 107 system, and the empty default sanitary folder is deleted.

228 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

and click OK. select one of the components in the system. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Place Base. as shown. 16 In the Select a System dialog. select Sanitary 107. for example. 18 Click to select a point to the left of the accessible toilet. 15 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. at the midpoint of the detail lines. Creating a Sanitary System | 229 . The base creates a vertical pipe for the system to connect into and establishes a source or an outlet for flow. a toilet.Create physical connections 14 In the plan view. A preview of the piping layout displays. The base is placed.

28 On the Options Bar. select Branch. 24 For Offset.05%. You accept this suggested solution. 29 On the Options Bar. enter 1. When laying out a number of different systems with different offset requirements. You override the default pipe settings before applying the recommended pipe layout. enter -1225. select 100 mm. and modify it to meet project requirements. 230 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . click (Next Solution) until Solution Type 2 of 7 is selected. 27 For Offset. for Slope. The default settings are automatically modified. 30 Click Modify. 23 For Pipe Type. select Main. select Intersections. for Solution Type. enter -350 mm. The positive value slopes the pipe down toward the base point. The elevation is specified low enough to allow sloping of the sanitary piping in the system. it is helpful to be able to change the defaults as you work.Sanitary. click Solutions. 20 On the Generate Layout panel. select PVC . and for Offset.Sanitary. 25 In the left pane. 21 On Options Bar. enter -350 mm. The elevation of the base with relation to the other components in the system is critical. 22 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. and click OK. 26 For Pipe Type. select PVC .19 On the Options Bar. and click Settings. for Diameter.

and move the cursor to the left to align all 4 segments to the base point. Creating a Sanitary System | 231 . 32 Click the move parallel control (4-way arrow). select the vertical route path segments.Customize the suggested layout 31 While pressing Ctrl.

33 In the 3D view. 232 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 35 Select the vertical branch line for one of the toilets. as shown. use the ViewCube to orient the view. as shown. 34 Click Modify. and drag the line to the left to snap perpendicular to the main.

adjust the vertical branch line for the other toilet. click Finish Layout. 37 On the Generate Layout panel.36 Using the previous method. Creating a Sanitary System | 233 .

and examine the sanitary tee to verify proper orientation. 234 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .Examine the piping Complete all steps in this section in the 3D Plumbing .Overall. When a fitting is reversed. and press Tab 4 times to check connectivity. select the fitting and click to reorient it. 38 Highlight one of the plumbing fixtures. ■ ■ ■ ■ 1=Branch in a network 2=Branch in a network including the branch objects 3=Branch in a network up to a piece of equipment 4=Network (including fixtures) 39 Click to select the fitting to the drain.

41 Close the file with or without saving it. and check the slope control. and manually creating the piping that connects them to the sanitary system. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 235 . you continue with the work from the last exercise. as shown. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System In this exercise.40 Select the pipe segment to the right of the fitting. adding sinks in the men’s room. The slope control for every segment should indicate the slope is toward the sanitary outlet.

236 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .Design is open.rvt. Add sinks to the layout 1 In the Project Browser. verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected. in the Type Selector. 5 On the Placement panel. 6 Click to place the sink centered on the horizontal reference line.Rectangular. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Zoom in to the men’s room (Space Male 107).Design ➤ Floor Plans. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . 4 On the Element panel.Public.Plumbing Plan . select 560 mmx560 mm . and verify that Level 1 .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. click Training Files. as shown. and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_03_m. under M_Lavatory .

8 Select the sink. Click the right endpoint of the placement reference line for the sink to establish a start point. and press Enter to create a second sink.2. enter 711. On the Options Bar.7 Click Modify. 9 Make 2 copies of the sink: ■ ■ ■ Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. ■ Move the cursor up above the reference line. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 237 . select Multiple.

Press Esc. and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen. and press Enter to create the third sink. enter 711. 238 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . ■ Add sinks to the sanitary system 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser.■ Move the cursor up above the reference line. 14 On the Edit Piping System panel. 12 In the drawing area. 13 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. click Add To System. select a component of the Sanitary 107 system. expand Sanitary ➤ Sanitary 107. 11 In the System Browser.2. 15 Click the 3 sinks.

Overall. double-click 3D Plumbing . Create piping to connect the sinks 17 In the Project Browser. In the System Browser. use the ViewCube to orient the view. notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) have been added to the Sanitary 107 system. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 239 . 20 Select the fitting. and zoom in to the elbow fitting for the urinal. and click the + control on the left to upgrade the fitting to a tee. click Finish Editing System. under Design ➤ Plumbing .16 On the Edit System panel. 19 In the 3D view.Design ➤ 3D Views. 18 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. as shown. 21 Select the tee.

enter 760 mm. right-click the top connector (sanitary connector). 25 Move the cursor up to the centerline of the middle sink. 240 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . the pipe being drawn automatically assumes the size and elevation of the fitting.22 In the plan view. 23 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch off this option. enter 1. for Slope. and click to draw the pipe. with the tee fitting selected.05%. press Spacebar. and click Apply. 26 On the Options Bar. When you press the Spacebar. 24 On the Options Bar. 27 Click Modify. and click Draw Pipe. for Offset.

PVC .Sch 40 .3D view shown for clarity 28 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. move the cursor over the stub pipe. select Standard. under M_Wye 45 Deg Double . 29 In the Type Selector. click to place the fitting.DWV. 32 Select the double wye fitting. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 241 . 30 In the 3D view. and when the vertical center line displays. 31 Click Modify. and click the lower rotate control to align the fitting parallel to the sinks.

and press Enter. enter 305 mm. for Offset. 242 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 38 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch on this option. 39 Draw the pipe as shown: ■ Draw at a 45 degree angle up and to the right. enter 150 mm. Add pipe stubs to the double wye 35 In the plan view.33 With the fitting selected. double-click the section head to open the section view. 37 Select the fitting. on the Options Bar. In the next steps. and click Draw Pipe. you add pipe segments to the double wye. right-click the right connector. 34 Press Esc. zoom in to the double wye fitting. 36 In the section view. and press Enter.

as shown. which automatically sets the length of the pipe to the value entered. 41 Using the same method. 43 Select the center vertical pipe in the double wye fitting. 42 Click Modify. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 243 . and click to place the pipe. ■ Move the cursor horizontally to the right until the end of the pipe segment intersects with the centerline of the right sink. draw similar piping for the left sink (the first segment angled at 135°).Entering a length dimension while drawing pipes activates Revit MEP’s listening dimension tool. 40 Click Modify.

47 Move the cursor down. 46 In the section view. press Spacebar. and press Esc.44 Drag the upper control until the pipe aligns with the centerline of the horizontal piping. enter 150 mm. and click Draw Pipe. draw a selection box around the left sink to select it. 48 Click Modify. 49 Using the same method. 244 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . draw a 150 mm pipe for the other 2 sinks. Add P-Trap Fittings 45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile so you can see all 3 views. right-click the bottom connector. and press Enter to create the segment of pipe.

click to place the P-Trap at the endpoint of the stub pipe for the top sink. under M_Trap P . select Standard. rotate the P-Trap for the other 2 sinks. 53 Using the same method.Sch 40 . 51 In the Type Selector. 56 Using the same method.50 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 245 .PVC .DWV. and click the rotate control 3 times to orient the pipe toward the double wye piping. 55 In the 3D view. select the P-Trap on the left. place a P-Trap on the other 2 sinks. 52 In the plan view. You can see in the 3D view that it is connected. You adjust the orientation after placing all 3 P-Traps. 54 Click Modify.

Click Modify Pipe Fittings tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. The piping is connected and the appropriate fittings are automatically created. 246 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . Move the cursor to the left. Select the double wye pipe on the left. In the plan view. and press Enter. 58 Using the same method. Click in the plan view. connect the right sink to the double wye. Click Modify. and click Draw Pipe. enter 150 mm. 59 Connect the middle sink using a routing solution: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view.. select the left P-Trap. right-click the left connector on the P-Trap. click to select the P-Trap for the middle sink.57 Finish the connection for the left sink: ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view.

select PVC Sanitary. select the section of pipe you just drew. and select a proposed solution. select the 3 horizontal pipes from the sinks. On the Routing Solutions panel. while pressing Ctrl. Routing Solutions tools are activated that let you add control points or remove control points. Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Routing Solutions. as shown. Press Esc. and select the vertical section of pipe from the wye.■ In the 3D view. under Pipe Types. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 247 . while pressing Ctrl. ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify a slope 60 In the 3D view. In the Type Selector. click Finish to select the recommended solution.

63 On the Slope Editor panel.rvt. you continue with the work on the sanitary system. and verify the slope.61 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Slope. verify that 1. 65 Close the file with or without saving it. 64 Select a pipe that you just modified. and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_04_m. You have appropriately sloped the pipe. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. 62 On the Options Bar. for Slope.05% is selected. Refining the Sanitary Stack In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 248 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . adjusting the sanitary stack. click Finish.

click Modify.Design. select the elbow fitting on the right.Sch 40 . Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 1. select the vertical stack. 5 Select the tee. and click Draw Pipe. and adjust the views as necessary to view the plumbing. and click to draw the pipe.Plumbing Plan . 6 Move the cursor up to the 02 .Design. 3 In the Section view.DWV. 10 In the 3D view. under M_Wye Combination with 8th Bend . Refining the Sanitary Stack | 249 .PVC . and open the following views: ■ ■ ■ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 .Floor level line. Add a reducing wye to the stack 8 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. right-click the top connector.Overall. and click the intersection to place the fitting.Add a vertical soil stack 1 In the Project Browser. 7 On the Selection panel. select Standard. 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing. as shown. 4 Click the top + control to upgrade the fitting to a tee. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . 2 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 9 In the Type Selector.

11 Click Modify. 12 Select the fitting, and click the flip control to change the orientation. 13 Click the rotate control once.

14 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 300 mm. 15 Press Esc.

Add a pipe plug to cap the cleanout 16 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. 17 In the Type Selector, under M_Plug - PVC - Sch 40 - DWV, select Standard. 18 In the plan view, click the midpoint at the end of the sanitary pipe, as shown.

250 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

19 Click Modify. The plug is added to the end to cap off the cleanout. A cleanout is required on all vertical stacks.

20 Close the file with or without saving it.

Creating the Cold Water System
In this exercise, you create the domestic cold water system and add piping to connect all of the fixtures in the men’s room to the system.

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_05_m.rvt.

Specify mechanical settings for the hot and cold water systems 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and verify that Level 1 - Plumbing Plan - Design is open.

Creating the Cold Water System | 251

2 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤

.

3 In the left pane of the Mechanical settings dialog, expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion, and click Main. 4 In the right pane, for System Type, select Domestic Hot Water. 5 Specify options for the Main hot water piping:
■ ■

For Pipe Type, select Pipe Types: Water. For Offset, verify that the value is 2740 mm.

6 In the left pane, select Branch, for System Type, select Domestic Hot Water, and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Hot Water system. 7 In the left pane, select Main, and for System Type, select Domestic Cold Water. 8 Specify options for the Main cold water piping:
■ ■

For Pipe Type, select Pipe Types: Water. For Offset, enter 2820 mm. To minimize opportunities for piping interference, you specify different offset elevations for the cold water piping and the hot water piping.

9 In the left pane, select Branch, and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Cold Water system. (Remember to specify Domestic Cold Water as the System Type.) 10 Click OK. Create the cold water system 11 In the Project Browser, under Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ 3D Views, double-click 3D Plumbing - Overall. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser, and position the browser at the bottom of the screen. 14 In the System Browser, minimize the Sanitary system, if necessary, expand Unassigned, and notice that Default Domestic Hot Water and Default Domestic Cold Water systems are listed. These categories include all of the components placed earlier that have relevant connectors. 15 In the plan view, draw a selection box to select the toilets, urinal, and sinks. (Do not select the floor drain because it does not have a hot or cold water connector.) 16 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 17 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Plumbing Fixtures, and click OK.

252 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

18 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Cold Water. 19 On the System Tools panel, click Edit System. 20 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

For System Name, enter DCW 107. For Flow Conversion Method, verify that Predominantly Flush Valves is selected.

21 On the Edit System panel, click Finish Editing System. In the System Browser, notice that the Default Domestic Cold water system is removed because all of the fixtures have been added to the DCW 107 system. Expand Domestic Cold Water ➤ DCW 107 to verify the components. Create piping for the cold water system 22 In the 3D view, select the toilet closest to the vertical soil stack. 23 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 24 Click the horizontal water main above the toilets.

25 Using the same method, connect the second toilet.

Creating the Cold Water System | 253

26 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe. 27 On the Placement Tools panel, verify that Automatically Connect is selected. 28 In the Type Selector, under Pipe Types, select Water. 29 On the Options Bar:
■ ■ ■

For Diameter, select 20 mm. For Offset, enter 3048 mm. For Slope, enter 0%.

30 In the plan view, click to the left of the urinal, at the intersection of the water main pipe, as shown.

31 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 990 mm. 32 Move the cursor to the right, and click the connector, as shown.

33 Click Modify. 34 In the plan view, select the sink above the urinal, right-click the top DCW connector, and click Draw Pipe. 35 In the Type Selector, verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. 36 Move the cursor to the left, press Spacebar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the existing pipe, enter 140 mm, and press Enter.

37 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 100 mm, and press Enter. 38 Move the cursor up to the top of the third sink, and click to place the pipe.

254 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

39 Move the cursor to the left, and click to connect to the main cold water line. (Status Bar indicates Horizontal and [Pipes : Pipe Types : Water]). 40 Click Modify.

41 Select the top sink, and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 42 In the Select Connector dialog, select Connector 1 : Domestic Cold Water : Round : 25 mm : In, and click OK. 43 Click the branch cold water pipe.

The sink is connected to the cold water branch piping.

Creating the Cold Water System | 255

44 Using the same method, connect the middle sink to the branch pipe.

45 Close the file with or without saving it.

Creating the Hot Water System
In this exercise, you create the hot water system, add a water heater, and add piping to connect the sinks in the menu’s room to the system.

256 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_06_m.rvt.

Create the hot water system 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and verify that Level 1 - Plumbing Plan - Design is open. 2 In the Project Browser, open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing - Overall. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 4 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser, and position the browser at the bottom of the screen. 5 In the System Browser, expand the Unassigned folder, and expand the Default Domestic Hot Water system. Notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) are listed. 6 In the plan view, while pressing Ctrl, select the 3 sinks.

Creating the Hot Water System | 257

7 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Hot Water. 8 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ System Properties. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog, for System Name, enter DHW 107, and click OK. In later steps, you edit the system to add equipment. 10 In the System Browser, the Domestic Hot Water 107 system is listed along with the 3 sinks (lavatories). When designing systems, a best practice to maximize operation is to assign all components to the appropriate system and clear the default folders. Add a water heater 11 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 12 In the Type Selector, under M_Water Heater - Tankless, select 2.3 L. 13 In the plan view, click to position the water heater in the lower left corner of the utility room above the bathroom, as shown.

14 Click Modify. 15 In the System Browser, in the Unassigned folder. Default Domestic Hot Water, Default Domestic Cold Water, Default Other folders are created and the Water Heater is listed. (The folders are created according to the connectors available on the hot water heater.) Add the water heater to DCW 107 16 Select a sink in the men’s room. You add the water heater to the Domestic Cold Water system first. 17 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel, verify that DCW 107 is selected, and click Edit System.

258 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. 19 Select the water heater, and on the Edit System panel, click Finish Editing System. Connect the water heater to the cold water supply 20 In the plan view, select the water heater, right-click the middle left connector, and select Draw Pipe.

21 On the Placement Tools panel, verify that Automatically Connect is turned on. 22 In the Type Selector, verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. 23 On the Options Bar, specify:
■ ■ ■

Diameter: 25 mm. Offset: 2000 mm. Slope: 0%.

Press Enter. 24 Move the cursor up, enter 455 mm, and press Enter. 25 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 3048 mm, and press Enter. 26 Move the cursor to the right, and click the water main line, as shown.

27 Click Modify. The tankless water heater is connected to the cold water supply.

Creating the Hot Water System | 259

Add the water heater to Domestic Hot Water 107 28 In the plan view, select a sink. 29 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel, and in the System Selector, select DHW 107. 30 On the System Tools panel, click Edit System. 31 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. 32 Click the tankless hot water heater.

33 On the Edit System panel, click Finish Editing System. Connect the water heater to the hot water supply 34 Select the water heater, right-click the bottom connector (domestic hot water), and click Draw Pipe. 35 On the Options Bar, for Diameter, enter 25 mm, and for Offset, select 2000 mm. Press Enter. 36 Move the cursor down, enter 455 mm, and press Enter. 37 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 2740 mm, and on the Placement Tools panel, click Automatically Connect to switch it off. 38 Move the cursor to the right, and click just to the left of the cold water pipe, as shown.

260 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

39 Move the cursor down, enter 305 mm, and press Enter. 40 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 815 mm. 41 Move the cursor down, and click just below the drain of the bottom sink, as shown.

42 Click Modify.

Creating the Hot Water System | 261

43 In the 3D view. 45 Using the same method and the Connect Into tool. 44 Select the horizontal pipe that you just drew. The hot water pipe is automatically connected to the sink. select the left sink (the one closest to the urinal). 262 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. connect the other 2 sinks to the hot water pipe.

46 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating the Hot Water System | 263 .

264 .

you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a fire protection system. 265 .Creating a Fire Protection System In this tutorial.

266 .

In this tutorial. with Space components placed in the areas throughout the model. and then you configure conversion settings that you will use when you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session.autodesk. A copy is made of the Standard pipe type. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially.rvt. and click Duplicate. Specifying Pipe Settings In this exercise. 2 Right-click Standard. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_01_m. you can choose to save your work. click Training Files. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Metric directory.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. To learn more about linking and preparing an architectural model. You will also check a Space Schedule that you can use to assess the coverage for the fire protection systems. you will use a project file that has already been linked to an architectural model. you will create a wet fire protection system for the second floor of an office building. After finishing each exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. see Planning Mechanical Systems in the Mechanical Systems tutorial. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. you begin work on the project that contains a wet fire protection system. 267 . expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. However. You create a new pipe type. go to http://www.Planning a Fire Protection System 11 The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. In this lesson. If the tutorial training files are not present. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

you should configure or verify the Conversion settings before you convert a layout path. The new pipe type is created based on the Standard pipe type. you created a new pipe type for the wet fire protection system and modified its type properties. For Pipe Type. you modify the type properties of the pipe. 6 In the Project Browser. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. For Pipe Type. For Offset. 268 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . select Main. You now specify the conversion settings for the pipe branches. This is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. In this exercise. Determining Zone Requirements In this exercise. verify that 2800 is specified. 10 Close the file with or without saving it. structural beams. In the next exercise. verify that Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet is listed. Configuring the Conversion settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them during your project. under Mechanical. 8 In the Mechanical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. select Carbon Steel. select Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion ➤ Branch. This offset elevation places the pipe branches at 2800 mm above the referenced level for the views. you create a sprinkler zone project parameter. However. and then click OK. so the pipe main will be offset from level 2. click Rename. The conversion settings for the Fire Protection Wet system type display. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. 4 Right-click Fire Protection Wet. For System Type. You can configure the Conversion settings at the beginning or during your project. Level 2 is the referenced level for the views where you will be designing. For Offset. Configure pipe conversion settings 7 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. select Fire Protection Wet. For System Type. Next. duct. verify that 2800 is selected. and enter Fire Protection Wet. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. You also configured the conversion settings for both wet and dry fire protection systems. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. select Fire Protection Wet. 9 Click OK. and click Properties.3 Right-click the copy (Standard 2). In the left pane. you create project parameters and work with schedules. for Material. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 2800 mm above the referenced level for the views. You then assign spaces in the top portion of the plan to one zone and spaces in the bottom portion to another zone. or architectural components. NOTE Conversion settings are applied when you convert the pipe layout path to physical piping.

5 Click OK twice. select Spaces. for Name. and click Element Properties. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select Fire Protection. under Fire Protection. and then click OK. click Add.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser. enter Zone 1. select the upper half of the building. right-click. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name.Design is highlighted.rvt. Under Categories. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_02_m. select space Instruction 221 as shown.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . the space crossing lines display. For Group parameter under. indicating that it’s the active view. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . 7 In the Instance Properties dialog. 8 Using a crossing window. for Sprinkler Zone. When you highlight a space using the cursor. You draw a crossing window from the lower left to the upper right of the area you want to enclose.Fire Protection Piping Plan . 3 In the Project Parameters dialog. click Training Files. 6 In the drawing area. Determining Zone Requirements | 269 . enter Sprinkler Zone.

filter the bottom half of the building to select only Spaces. 10 In the Filter dialog. 16 Close the file with or without saving it. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. for Sprinkler Zone. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog.rvt. 15 Press Esc to clear the selection. under Fire Protection. 270 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . and then access instance properties.9 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. for Sprinkler Zone. 12 In the Instance Properties dialog. and then click OK. to which you add various parameters. you create schedules for sprinkler design. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule In this exercise. select Zone 1. 13 Using the same method. click Training Files. verify that only Spaces are selected. under Fire Protection. and then click OK. You modify the schedules and add an embedded schedule in order to use the schedule as a design tool. including a calculated value parameter. and click OK. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_03_m. enter Zone 2.

For Key name. enter Light. select mm. click the Formatting tab. The schedule displays. for Name. select Spaces. select 0 decimal places. 7 Click OK. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter data. click Add Parameter. 15 In the new row: ■ In the Protection Area Type column. and click Field Format. Click OK. For Rounding. select Length. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Use project settings.Design is highlighted. 13 To resize the column widths in the schedule. click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Rows: New. create a parameter named Maximum Coverage Area that is an Area type and is grouped under Fire Protection. enter Maximum Spacing.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 14 Select the new header. select Millimeters. select Fire Protection. double-click on each column separator. For Unit symbol. select Maximum Spacing. 9 On the Formatting tab. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 271 . ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a schedule parameter 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog. Add schedule data 12 Select the header in the Key Name column and enter Protection Area Type as the new header. For Name. Click OK. enter Sprinkler Spacing and Coverage Area Schedule. indicating that it’s the active view.Create a key schedule 1 In the Project Browser. For Group parameter under. 8 In the Schedule Properties dialog.Fire Protection Piping Plan . 10 In the Format dialog. and on the ribbon. 11 Click OK twice. 6 Using the same method. Select Schedule keys. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . Obstructed-Combustible. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. Notice that the schedule name and the phase are automatically added. For Units. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. enter Protection Area Construction Type. For Type of Parameter.

Unobstructed Maximum Spacing Maximum Coverage Area Create a sprinkler schedule 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 18 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Category. and press Enter. In the Maximum Coverage Area column. Unobstructed Extra.■ ■ In the Maximum Spacing column. enter Sprinkler Schedule. Unobstructed Ordinary. Obstructed-Noncombustible Light. enter 40. 16 Using the same method. add more schedule data: Protection Area Type Light. Obstructed-Combustible Extra. Obstructed-Combustible Ordinary. enter 4575. Obstructed-Noncombustible Ordinary. NOTE The units of measure display automatically. Obstructed-Noncombustible Extra. For Name. based on the parameter settings you specified previously. Click OK. 272 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . select Spaces.

select Minimum Sprinklers. The resulting formula is Area/Maximum Coverage Area. select 0 decimal place. select Fixed. 22 Click OK twice. select Common. This calculated value parameter allows you to immediately determine what spaces meet the sprinkler design requirements. Click OK. 20 On the Formatting tab.Specify fields and create a calculated value parameter ■ In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ On the Fields tab. enter Minimum Sprinklers. 21 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use default settings. 19 Click the Formatting tab. For Discipline. Enter the formula operator / after Area. and then use the method learned previously to select Maximum Coverage Area from the Fields dialog. and click Field Format. select Number. For Type. The Sprinkler Schedule displays. select Area. The Minimum Sprinklers calculated value is added to the scheduled fields (at the bottom of the list). For Formula. For Units. In the Fields dialog. under Available fields. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 273 . double-click in the order listed: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Number Name Sprinkler Zone Level Area Protection Area Construction Type Maximum Coverage Area Maximum Spacing ■ ■ Click Calculated Value. For Rounding. In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. click . and click OK.

select Level. 25 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab. For Fields.Organize schedule data 23 Right-click in the schedule. At the bottom of the dialog. click Edit. Select Header and Blank line. 26 Click OK 3 times. under Other. The schedule is arranged and sorted as specified. select Hidden field. for Sorting/Grouping. Under Field formatting. select Sprinkler Zone. and click View Properties. and select Totals only. for Sort by. Select Header and Blank line. 274 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . ■ In the Format dialog. and then select Hidden field. and then click Field Format. select Minimum Sprinklers. verify that Use default settings is selected. For Then by (second instance). For Fields. For Then by. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. select Level. select Sprinkler Zone. On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Fields. select Number. select Grand totals.

On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. and click View Properties. select Embedded Schedule.27 In the drawing area. ■ ■ ■ 38 Click OK 3 times. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. For Category. 29 In the Schedule Properties dialog. select Calculate totals. 32 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Headers: Group. select Sprinklers. 34 In the Maximum Coverage Area column and in the Maximum Spacing column. delete the word Maximum. System Name. and click View Properties. and then click Embedded Schedule Properties. select Grand totals. Under Field formatting. select Count. right-click the schedule. and enter Maximum Sprinkler Spacing and Area Coverage. Create an embedded schedule 35 Right-click the schedule. for Fields. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 275 . Group schedule columns 31 In the drawing area. for Available fields. The schedule is filtered to show only zones on level 2. 33 Click in the grouped header cell. and Count. 37 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Embedded Schedule tab. 36 In the Instance Properties dialog. 28 In the Instance Properties dialog. for Filter. double-click Type. under Other. 30 Click OK twice. select Level equals Level 2. click Edit. and select Totals only. for Filter by. use click and drag to select the last 4 schedule column headers. On the Formatting tab. click Edit. for Embedded Schedule.

for Protection Area Construction Type. 48 In the floor plan. 50 Access the instance properties. under Identity Data. you are actually editing information in a database of building information. select space 221 Instruction. click in the floor plan to make it the active view. double-click FP . As a result. 45 For Protection Area Construction Type. each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project. 52 Click OK. and click OK. 40 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile to tile the floor plan and the Sprinkler Schedule. 51 In the Instance Properties dialog. use a selection box to select the upper half of the building. under Identity Data. select Ordinary. Notice also that the Maximum Spacing and Maximum Coverage Area parameters that you created are listed under Fire Protection. 43 Click Cancel. This digital database information source is the central concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM). and the spacing parameter values are evident. Notice that the selection you made in the schedule displays in the dialog. 47 In the Instance Properties dialog. 44 In the schedule. for Protection Area Construction Type. 41 In the plan view. 49 Filter the selection for spaces only. and access the instance properties. IMPORTANT A schedule in Revit MEP is not only a construction document but also a design tool. Unobstructed. but their values are not determined. select Light. select space 221 Instruction. 42 In the Instance Properties dialog.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 276 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . notice that there is nothing specified for Protection Area Construction Type. 46 With the space still selected.Modify space properties from the schedule 39 In the Project Browser. Unobstructed. The parameter change is evident in the schedule. When you change editable entries in the schedule to modify your system. Unobstructed. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. under Identity Data. select Ordinary.Fire Protection Plan Design.

Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 277 .53 Close the file with or without saving it.

278 .

NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. By following the recommended workflow. you place host-based sprinklers in a ceiling plan view. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . click Training Files. If the tutorial training files are not present. you can choose to save your work.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. you learn the best practices for designing systems with Revit MEP. hosted to the linked architectural ceiling family. 279 . You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. As you place the sprinklers.Designing a Fire Protection System 12 In this tutorial. methodology.autodesk. Place host-based sprinklers 1 In the Project Browser. you create a wet fire protection system using a linked architectural model of a building project.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans. However. At the end of this tutorial. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. and specific techniques for designing fire protection systems in Revit MEP. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. you follow a series of exercises that teach the recommended systems design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. After finishing each exercise. you will understand the process. You will use the sprinkler schedule that you created in a previous exercise as a design guide for sprinkler placement. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Metric directory. and double-click Level 2 . Adding Sprinklers In this exercise. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_01_m. go to http://www. As you create the system.FP_Ceiling to make it the active view. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to create a fire protection system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. you will learn various methods to quickly and precisely place sprinklers into the ceiling plan. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise.

After placing the initial sprinkler. When this happens. open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Sprinkler Schedule. and arrange the views so that they are tiled horizontally. Sprinklers should either be aligned to each other or sufficiently separated to allow space for fittings. 5 Click in the ceiling plan to make it the active view. 6 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler.2 Zoom in to the spaces in the lower right corner of the building. there is insufficient space between the 2 branches to place fittings and the conversion will fail. When there is a small misalignment. the layout path feature will attempt to create separate piping paths to the sprinklers. 3 In the Project Browser. This action aligns sprinklers so that the piping layout is more efficient. IMPORTANT The alignment of sprinklers is critical and will affect the conversion of a layout path to physical piping in later exercises. 280 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. you copy and array sprinklers referencing the intersection of ceiling grids.

206. 14 Select the upper left corner near the copy selection as the copy start point. Notice that a border displays to indicate the copy selection.7 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel. the cursor changes to indicate that the Copy tool is active. 11 In the drawing area. Notice that the sprinkler schedule updates to show the sprinklers you added in space 202. 10 Press Esc twice. and that Copy and Multiple are selected. verify that Constrain is cleared. Also. 8 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face to place the sprinkler on the ceiling tile face. 9 In space Instruction 202. place the cursor over the approximate center of the ceiling tiles. Adding Sprinklers | 281 . Continue placing sprinklers You copy the existing sprinklers to place other sprinklers in spaces 205. 13 On the Options Bar. while pressing Ctrl. and 207. because the schedule indicates that each of those spaces requires a minimum of 3 sprinklers. and select M_Sprinkler-Pendent-Hosted : 15mm Pendent from the Type Selector drop-down. You can use the Minimum Sprinklers column in the schedule as guidance when you design the fire protection system. select the sprinklers that you placed. 12 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. as shown. because it calculates the number of sprinklers needed for each space and the maximum distance between sprinklers. and click to place 3 sprinklers.

Place non-hosted sprinklers In this section. 17 In the Project Browser. Next. 18 Type WT. Copies of the sprinklers are placed after you specify the end point.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . open Design ➤ FP . and array the sprinklers in the 3 spaces that comprise the Corridor (200A. 200B.15 Select points in the 2 spaces to the left. specify a vertical offset.Fire Protection Piping Plan . and then tile the floor plan and schedule views horizontally. You place the system components based on the design requirements (sprinkler count and spacing) indicated in the schedule. you place non-hosted sprinklers. you place non-hosted sprinklers. and 200C). 16 Close the ceiling plan view. as shown. 282 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . and then press Esc.Design.

click to place a sprinkler at the beginning of the corridor as shown.FP_Ceiling view. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. Because this is an upright sprinkler with its connector facing down. This specifies an elevation for the sprinkler that makes it visible in the Level 2 . under Constraints. Array sprinklers 26 With the sprinkler still selected. you use the Layout Path tools to create the initial layout for the piping. 28 Click the center of the existing sprinkler as the start point. and then creating the logical connection between these system components. you create a wet sprinkler system and add piping to connect the sprinklers that you placed. Creating a Piping System In this exercise. you placed 2 types of sprinklers using various placement methods. 27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Clear Group And Associate. and click Element Properties. it must be positioned above the piping to which it will be connected. 30 Close the file with or without saving it.19 In the floor plan. This number is determined in the schedule. Then you simplify the layout using Modify tools from the Generate Layout tab on the ribbon to modify Creating a Piping System | 283 . 25 Click OK. by adding the minimum number of sprinklers for the 3 corridor spaces combined. 22 In the 200A Corridor space. it’s added to the space at an offset of 0. 21 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel. click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Array. enter 11. For Number. 29 Press Esc. for Offset. 23 Right-click the sprinkler. 20 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. and with piping (physical connection). and then click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. In the next exercise. Because the sprinkler is not hosted. zoom in to the entire wing in the lower right of the building. enter 4100. and press Enter. Next. After creating the logical connection. A system is the logical connection between system components such as sprinklers. indicating that the design requirements for the corridor spaces have been met. you adjust the offset. and select M_Sprinkler-Upright : 15mm Upright from the Type Selector drop-down. enter 2900 mm. You create fire protection systems by placing sprinklers. you connect the sprinklers by creating a system (logical connection). This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses including flow and pressure. In this exercise.0. move the cursor to the right. Notice that the schedule updates.

284 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .pipe branches prior to converting the layout to piping. and select Piping. IMPORTANT System components that you place are initially located under a default system category in the Unassigned folder. 2 Zoom in to the wing at the lower right of the building. IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_02_m. This is the recommended workflow or best practice for systems creation in Revit MEP. as shown. indicating that it’s the active view. they are moved from the Unassigned folder to their respective assigned system folder.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 6 Expand the Unassigned ➤ Default Fire Protection Wet system to view the level 2 sprinklers that you placed in the building. 5 Right-click the header.Design is highlighted. click View ➤ Systems. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Fire Protection Plan . This occurs because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed in order to perform calculations such as flow. 1 In the Project Browser. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. Unlike logical connections (systems). As you assign sprinklers to systems. piping is necessary to perform calculations that reference the physical pipe geometry such as sizing. Connect sprinklers with a system 7 Draw a selection box (from left to right) around the sprinklers in the office spaces. However. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 4 Drag the System Browser so that it docks at the bottom of the drawing area. click Training Files. Explore the System Browser 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser.rvt. physical connections (piping) are not required for systems designing. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP .

You also verify the pipe conversion settings that you configured earlier in this tutorial. and select the system. Create the initial layout The Layout Paths tools let you specify a source for the system. double-click the Fire Protection Wet system listing to view the list of sprinklers. The selected fire protection wet system highlights in red. You can now view the fire protection system hierarchy: the Fire Protection Wet system logically connects the sprinklers. The wet system that logically connects the sprinklers displays in red to indicate that the new system is selected. you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. all of the selected sprinklers have been moved from the Default Fire Protection Wet folder to the new system folder. 10 Right-click Fire Protection Wet . The Fire Protection Wet system is created and listed in the System Browser. and click Select. Creating a Piping System | 285 . place the cursor over a sprinkler. 11 With the system still selected.8 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Fire Protection Wet to create a fire protection wet system. and assign the selected sprinklers to it. you use the System Browser to confirm and validate the system. TIP If you click in the drawing area and the red system display clears. In the System Browser. within the Piping Systems folder. Revit MEP uses these settings to convert the preview layout path to physical piping. select an initial piping layout. named Fire Protection Wet. indicating the logical connection. click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. Now that the sprinklers are logically connected. Confirm and validate the system 9 In the System Browser. Next. press Tab. and make preliminary modifications to simplify the piping layout.

Notice that the Options Bar allows you to verify or modify the system name.The Edit Piping System panel displays. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 2800 mm above level 2. 13 In the System Browser.Wet is selected. expand Fire Protection Wet ➤ FP Wet_Zone2 to see the included sprinklers. for System Name. enter FP Wet_Zone2. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Solutions. and on the Options Bar. click Solutions. click Settings. 24 On the Generate Layout panel. In the left pane. as shown. When the layout is finished. 19 Click OK. click Place Base. 18 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. 286 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . enter -3650. 21 Click in the upper right corner of the stairwell to place the base component. and a piping layout preview displays. 16 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. verify that Pipe Types: Fire Protection . 20 On the Generate Layout panel. The base component provides a source for the fire protection system. 12 On the Options Bar. 15 In the drawing area. 14 Click Finish Editing System. 23 For Offset. verify that Main is selected. verify that 2800. select 150 mm. for Diameter.0 is specified. Verify that the above pipe type and offset settings are the same for Branch. For Offset. these settings will convert the base component to a riser that extends from the bottom of Level 1 up to the connection with the level 2 sprinklers (2800 mm). system equipment. The Generate Layout tools are activated. NOTE The Generate Layout feature is available whenever a system component is selected. select Branch. select a sprinkler that belongs to FP Wet_Zone2. and number of elements in the system. For Pipe Type. providing system editing tools. 22 On the Options Bar. ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles.

and select solution 4. A (parallel movement control) displays. In general. The main piping preview connects to the base component in the stairwell. The layout path solution displays (blue represents the main piping run. and green represents branch lines). 27 Select the horizontal layout path segment connecting to the base point. click Modify. Creating a Piping System | 287 . the method for moving segments in a layout depends on the type of connection between a branch and the main piping: ■ Use (parallel movement control) to move the branch when an displays at the junction. First drag the tee or cross junction control to the desired location. and then drag the (elbow junction control) to merge the piping preview.25 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Solution Type. Modify the layout 26 You use the Modify tool to customize and simplify the layout. On the Generate Layout panel. verify that Network is selected. Use the arrow keys to view all the solutions. (elbow control) ■ Move each end separately when either a (tee junction control) or (cross junction control) displays at the junction.

31 Zoom in to the area with the sprinkler system. or that offset elevations are incorrect. or manually modify the pipe. 288 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . as shown. View the system in 3D 30 Open FP . 32 If necessary. Either relocate the system components.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ Room 214 3D Fire Protection. This pipe run physically connects the wet system sprinklers for the 3 offices on level 2. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. select a different layout solution. The most common causes of these errors are that there is insufficient space to create a pipe or a fitting. All of the fittings required to connect the pipes to the system components are automatically generated. 29 Click Finish Layout.28 Drag the parallel movement control up to a point between the office/corridor walls and the corridor sprinklers. IMPORTANT Errors may occur when you attempt to create pipe geometry during layout path conversion or pipe sizing. The pipe run geometry (main and branches) is created.

and select the elbow fitting as shown.Fire Protection Piping Plan .rvt. You add the remaining sprinklers to the current wet system to logically connect them. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Completing the Fire Protection Wet System In this exercise. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_03_m. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 289 . indicating that it’s the active view. Next. you complete the wet system by adding the remaining sprinklers to the FP Wet_Zone2 system using the Layout Path tool. and various manual pipe creation tools. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . and then you create piping to physically connect them. the Connect Into tool. click Training Files. 3 If necessary. you complete the level 2 wet fire protection system.Design is highlighted.33 Close the file with or without saving it. 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Zoom in.

6 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System so that you can add sprinklers to the system. The selected sprinklers are assigned to FP Wet_Zone2. air terminals. IMPORTANT After system components (sprinklers. Notice that the number of system elements updates on the Options Bar. System tools display on the Piping Systems tab.4 Click the left plus sign to upgrade the fitting to a tee. draw a selection box from lower left to upper right around the sprinklers in Corridor 200A as shown (don’t include the last 3 sprinklers). click Finish Editing System. 9 On the Edit System panel. 290 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . radiators. or a system component to display system tools. 5 In the drawing area. The tee provides an open connector that will serve as a base when laying out the piping for the sprinklers in the corridor. mechanical equipment. and click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. 10 Select a sprinkler in the corridor. This allows you to modify the system (logical connection). and pipe or duct is created. You can confirm the sprinkler system assignment in the floor plan view or in the System Browser. 7 On the Edit Piping System panel. and so on) are logically connected by a system. you can select the pipe or duct. select any sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. 8 In the corridor. click Add To System.

20 Open Design ➤ FP . and select solution 5. Connect the sprinklers with pipe 19 Zoom to the spaces at the right end of the corridor. and select the leftmost unconnected sprinkler.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Fire Protection. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 291 . 17 Use a selection box to select the remaining 7 sprinklers. 18 Click Finish Editing System. 21 In the Piping Plan. verify that Network is selected. The layout automatically creates a path connecting to the tee created earlier. 12 On the Options Bar. 23 View the result in the 3D view. and select the horizontal segment of main piping as shown. 14 Close the System Browser. and then tile the views. Notice that horizontal and vertical segments of pipe were added. 13 Click Finish Layout. zoom in to the corridor above the spaces that have piping.11 On the Generate Layout panel. select a sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. Add remaining sprinklers to FP Wet_Zone2 system 15 In the drawing area. verify that Solutions is selected. 22 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. for Solution Type. 16 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System.

draw pipe from the remaining unconnected sprinklers to the main pipe. select 2800. 28 In the drawing area.24 In the Piping Plan. pan and zoom to the next unconnected sprinkler. right-click. 25 Select the sprinkler. 26 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel.Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. 27 On the Options Bar. for Offset. and click Draw Pipe. and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection . Layout in 2D 292 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . click the intersection with the horizontal main pipe as the pipe endpoint. 29 Using the same method. and then press Esc.

for Scale.Design is highlighted. 4 On the Options Bar. Create a section view 1 In the Project Browser. Adding Vertical Supply Piping In this exercise.Layout in 3D Verify connectivity 30 Close the 3D view.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .Fire Protection Piping Plan .rvt. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . it’s a visual indication that all components are connected correctly. You also place a hose reel cabinet in the building and connect it to the supply standpipe. 32 Use the cursor to highlight a section of the pipe. click Training Files. click outside the corridor wall at the stairs to specify the section line start point. you create a section view that you will use to work with vertical piping. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 31 In the plan view. Because the whole system highlights. indicating that it’s the active view. 5 Draw the section: ■ In the drawing area. Click at the staircase to specify the section line endpoint. 2 Zoom to the offices in the lower right corner. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_04_m. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section. select 1 : 50. zoom so that you can see the entire wing with the fire protection system. and press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. ■ Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 293 . 33 Close the file with or without saving it. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

double-click on the section head to open the section view.6 Press Esc. and click View Properties. Specify section properties 7 In the drawing area. 294 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 8 Right-click.

15 Press Spacebar. 12 If necessary. 22 In the drawing area. and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection . and select Hose Reel Cabinet .Surface Mounted : from the drop-down list. For View Classification. and click Apply Default View Template. 21 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. for Sub-Discipline. 16 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel.Design. and click Draw Pipe. and then click the top + grip to upgrade the elbow fitting to a tee. for View Name. 14 Select the tee fitting. drag the top section boundary line up. select FP . select Design. Under Identity Data. 19 Make Level 2 . and press Enter. Add mechanical equipment 20 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 295 . enter FP Section_Stair.Fire Protection Plan . 18 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. and then right-click the top connector. Click OK. right-click Design ➤ FP .Design the active view. click on the wall (host face) near the stairs to place the cabinet as shown. For Default View Template. enter 2135.9 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. 13 Select the elbow fitting. and then click Modify. select MEP Section.Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. 10 In the Project Browser. 11 Zoom to the top near the horizontal pipe. 17 Move the cursor up.Design ➤ Sections ➤ FP Section_Stair.

23 In the section view. 28 Connect to the vertical pipe (using the Intersection and Horizontal snaps). 27 On the Placement Tools panel. zoom to the hose reel cabinet. select . right-click the connector on the left of the cabinet. for Diameter. 24 Select the cabinet. and click Draw Pipe. and then click Modify.Wet is selected from the Type Selector drop-down. verify that Automatically Connect is active. 296 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 26 On the Options Bar. 25 Verify that Fire Protection .

as shown. Add a valve 30 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory.rfa. 33 In the Type Selector. and then click Modify.29 Close the section view.50 mm is selected. click Yes to load a family. 31 In the alert dialog. 34 Select the midpoint of the horizontal pipe that extends from the cabinet. 32 In the Open dialog. Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 297 . and click Open. A 50 mm gate valve is placed in the 50 mm diameter pipe. verify that M_Gate Valve . navigate to Training\Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\M_Gate Valve 50-300 mm.

click Training Files. Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Enter WT to tile the 3D and floor plan views. you also create a sprinkler schedule to report the number of level 2 sprinklers. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.35 Open 3D Fire Protection. 3 Adjust the view in both windows to view the entire fire protection pipe run as shown. and zoom in to the cabinet to see the valve in 3D. Modifying Pipe Diameters In this exercise. 36 Close the file with or without saving it. you modify the diameter of the pipes so that the pipes are a better fit with the design specifications. You will work primarily in the floor plan view and validate the pipe geometry in the 3D view.rvt. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . and double-click 3D Fire Protection to make it the active view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and arrange them so that they’re tiled horizontally.Design ➤ 3D Views. 298 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . Because the pipe diameters depend on the number of sprinklers. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_05_m.

Modifying Pipe Diameters | 299 . select 25mm. The calculated size of a pipe is the result of the Sizing tool and not the result of a manual change of diameter. and because the design specifications require a 25mm diameter for pipes servicing 2 sprinklers. 8 Click Modify. 4 In the floor plan view. it’s more efficient to specify 25mm diameter for all pipe runs. or height. or height of pipe on the Options Bar is not considered sizing in Revit MEP. click Check None. for Diameter. height. Modify the diameter of the fire protection pipe run The majority of the pipe segments service no more than 2 sprinklers. 7 On the Options Bar. draw a selection box around the level 2 fire protection piping until just past the section line (don’t include the supply pipe or hose reel cabinet). width. Sizing is performed using the Sizing tool (Sizing dialog) to size the pipe based on a series of parameters and calculations. All selected piping is now 1" diameter. 5 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. width. Changing the diameter. or width. and then adjust branches servicing more than 2 sprinklers separately. 6 In the Filter dialog. starting at the lower left corner of the wing. select Pipe Fittings and Pipes.NOTE It is important to recognize the distinction between sizing and manually changing the diameter. and click OK.

. Clear Leader. 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 18 In the 3D view. click to place the tag. select the vertical pipe below the hose cabinet.rfa. 17 On the View Control Bar. 300 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 15 Place the cursor over the pipe segments shown. you isolate the piping to make it easier to select. The tags accurately display the size of the selected pipe segments. NOTE Tags are view specific. They display only in the view in which they were placed. zoom in to the right half of the wing (including the stairs). 14 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Verify that Horizontal is selected. Modify the diameter of the main 16 In the 3D view. and click Open. Press Esc. click Yes to load tags in the alert dialog. select the linked architectural file. 12 If necessary.Tag the pipes 9 In the floor plan view. 11 Click to select a segment of pipe in the corridor. and after each segment highlights. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. 13 Navigate to Training\Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\M_Pipe Size Tag. By hiding the linked file.

This highlights the piping between the vertical pipe and the last segment. for Diameter. 20 Click to select the main piping between these points. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 301 . press Tab. The diameter of the fire protection main piping changes. select 100mm. 21 On the Options Bar.19 Place the cursor over the section of main pipe feeding the last sprinkler. The main piping is selected and displays in red. and when the section highlights.

as shown.22 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. select the top segment of branch pipe in space Instruction 205. 24 In the drawing area. The pipe diameter is modified. and maximize the floor plan. and then tag the piping as shown. 23 Close the 3D view. 26 Using the same method. Modify the diameter of branch pipes The number of sprinklers serviced by a branch determines the pipe size used for that branch. for Diameter. select 40mm. change the diameter of the other top segments to 40mm to accommodate sprinklers. 302 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 25 On the Options Bar.

For additional practice. Explore different system designs and discover the power of Revit MEP. you created a wet fire protection system. Use the same system components and parameters as you did for level 2. use the methods that you learned and create the level 1 fire protection wet system. allowing you to immediately verify the pipe diameters. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 303 . The pipe run now complies with the design criteria. and the difference between how the software sizes pipe and how to manually modify pipe diameter. The completed fire protection system is included in the RME_FP_Design_06_m. You also learned the difference between creating rigid physical pipe connections and creating logical systems.27 This completes the Fire Protection tutorial. You learned how to manually change the diameter of a pipe. Feel free to modify the systems or create entirely new fire protection systems. In this exercise. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. you used various selection methods to modify the level 2 fire protection pipe run diameters. In this tutorial.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ 05_Fire Protection Systems folder under Training Files. You added tags to pipes.

304 .

create details. 305 . you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to create views. add annotations and dimensions.Documenting a Project In this tutorial. and create schedules for construction documentation for a project.

306 .

2 In the Project Browser. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . you begin the construction documentation for the building project. You then change the properties of the new view by applying a view template. 307 . Apply a view template 4 In the Project Browser. and view references. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. dependent views. right-click Copy of Level 1. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.Design ➤ Floor Plans. Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 duct plan 1 In the Project Browser. If the view included detail graphics. a plumbing isometric riser from a 3D design view. and apply a view template. under Floor Plans. callout views for a typical HVAC view and a detail view. You select Duplicate because only model elements are included in the original view. You learn to create: ■ ■ ■ ■ a duplicate plan view.rvt. right-click Level 1 HVAC Plan. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_01_m.Creating Documentation Views 13 In this lesson. 3 In the Rename View dialog. matchlines. you’d select Duplicate with Detailing. and click Rename. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. you duplicate an existing floor plan view to create a duct plan view. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise. and click Properties. and click OK.

7 Click Create Matchline Sketch tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Matchline Properties. This is useful when breaking up plans with varying geometries across levels. click Training Files. 11 Click beyond the exterior wall of the wing to specify the second point. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog.rvt. views and put them on the sheet. The view is automatically updated with the defined graphical style.5 In the Instance Properties dialog. 5 Make sure Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is the active view. and click OK. You crop a dependent view to show only the area marked by the matchline. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. 10 In the drawing area. The smaller (dependent) views inherit view properties and view-specific elements from the primary view. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. and then press Esc. Create matchlines Matchlines are used with dependent views. you use dependent views to accommodate such large buildings. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. 2 Right-click the dependent view title. You can modify the visibility of matchlines in specific views. and click Apply Default View Template. 7 Close the file without saving. Dependent views keep the primary/parent view as the working drawing and allow you to create smaller. 6 In the Project Browser. 9 Click OK. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_02_m. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. create dependent views for areas B and C. to delineate splits in a large floor plan. Duplicate a view to create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. more focused. verify that the top and bottom constraints are Unlimited. click to specify the first point of the matchline to the left of the plan and below gridline C. In the left pane of the Open dialog. as shown. 4 Using the same method. 308 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . under Identity Data ➤ Default View Template. and click OK. 3 In the Rename View dialog. 6 Click View tab ➤ Sheet Composition panel ➤ Matchline. Creating Dependent Views Because large buildings cannot fit on a single sheet at 1 : 100 scale. and click Rename. select HVAC Duct Plan-Documentation. and the floor plan is moved to its new location in the Project Browser hierarchy.

Creating Dependent Views | 309 . and click OK. For Line Pattern. 19 In the drawing area. click above and below the modified matchline to create view references. click the current value. select black. and then press Esc. 13 Press Esc twice. Creating view references 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ View Reference. 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. In the Color dialog. 17 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog. select Matchline: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Line Color. Click OK. For Line Weight.12 Draw a second matchline that spans the floor plan above gridline H. select Double Dash . select 11. Modify object styles 15 Zoom in to the left part of the upper matchline. 14 Click Finish Matchline.

Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B 310 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 25 Using the same method. 23 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. select Floor Plan: Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. on the Options Bar. 21 Using the same method. for Target view. and apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C to it.20 Select the upper view reference and. 22 Add a view reference below the lower matchline. apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B to the other view reference. crop the dependent views for plans B and C. 24 Use the grips on the crop lines to modify the view boundaries. as shown.

under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing-Design ➤ 3D Views. You pin the view to keep it from being moved inadvertently. 4 In the Project Browser. right-click Copy of 3D Plumbing. 29 Close the file with or without saving it. drag Plan_B onto Sheet M202 and Plan_C onto Sheet M203. indicating the detail and sheet number of each view. Duplicate a view and specify properties 1 In the Project Browser. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 311 . and drag Plan_A from the Project Browser onto the sheet. 2 Zoom in. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. click Training Files. 5 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Identity Data. 27 Using the same method. In the left pane of the Open dialog. enter Plumbing Isometric . right-click 3D Plumbing. and select the section box. For Default View Template.rvt.Domestic Water.Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C 26 Open Sheet M201. The view references in the primary view are automatically updated as the views are placed on sheets. you copy a 3D design view and modify it to create a 3D plumbing isometric riser for domestic water. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser In this exercise. 28 Make Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan the active view. 3 Click Modify Section Boxes tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin. and click Properties. and zoom to each of the view references. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_03_m. select Plumbing Isometric. for View Name.

and click to select it. for View Classification. 7 Select the WSHPs in the view. and click Apply Default View Template. 312 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . select Dash. select Plumbing. and then click OK. 10 Right-click. Click OK.Domestic Water. right-click Plumbing Isometric . For Pattern. 9 Highlight a segment of the cold water (blue) piping. 6 In the Project Browser. 11 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Weight. For Sub-Discipline. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element.■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. 8 Zoom in to the plumbing system. press Tab three times to highlight the pipe run. select Documentation. Click Apply. The section crop lines no longer display. The selected piping displays as a dashed line. and click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Element. select 3.

and click to select it.12 Highlight the vertical hot water segment of pipe coming off the tankless water heater. change the line weight to 4 and the line pattern to Dot 1mm. 13 Using the same method. press Tab 3 times. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 313 .

as shown). 314 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . This hides the sanitary piping in order to create a domestic water supply riser isometric view. and click to select it. 15 Right-click. press Tab 3 times (until the entire pipe network highlights. and click Hide in View ➤ Elements.14 Highlight a segment of horizontal sanitary pipe.

Isometric. On the View Control Bar. and in the view properties. ■ ■ Add a spot slope annotation 20 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Units. rename the new view Plumbing Isometric . and in the Type Selector. 21 In the Project Units dialog: ■ ■ For Discipline.5mm Arial. click on the Format value.16 Press Esc. 18 Label the fixtures as shown. For Slope. and then click in empty space in the drawing to end the label. Click in the drawing area to start a text label. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 315 . Hide domestic cold water and domestic hot water piping. specify Plumbing . click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. 19 Using methods learned previously.Sanitary Waste. 17 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. verify that Common is selected. and for Default View Template. select 1. create a sanitary riser isometric view: ■ Duplicate 3D Plumbing.

and click to place the spot slope annotation.■ In the Format dialog. When the view is associated with a sheet. Creating Callout Views In this exercise. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is highlighted. 23 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Spot Slope. you use a plan view to create a callout view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 24 Click on the horizontal pipe from the two end toilets to select it. 26 Press Esc twice. click Training Files. select To the nearest 10. and then place the callout view on a sheet. indicating that it’s the active view. the callout head on the original view is updated with the sheet information. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_04_m. 25 Move the cursor above the pipe.rvt. 316 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 27 Close the file with or without saving it. 22 Click OK twice. Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser. as shown. for Rounding. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.

beginning at the upper left and ending at the lower right. and select Floor Plan from the Type Selector drop-down.2 Zoom in to an office in Area C (the bottom-right section of the plan). and move it to the bottom right corner of the boundary. 8 Create an angled leader line by dragging the Drag control located at the center of the leader as shown. 6 Draw the callout around the ductwork as shown. for Scale. select 1 : 50. Select the Drag Head control (the control on the leader line that is closest to the callout head). 7 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ Select the callout boundary. Creating Callout Views | 317 . 4 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout. 5 On the Options Bar.

HVAC Duct Plan & Sections. 10 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. Expand the Callout Boundary category and. using the same method. ■ Place the view on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser. Click OK. and select the viewport. 13 In the Project Browser. select 5. 11 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog: ■ ■ For the Callout Boundary category. Rename the detail view and modify view settings 14 Zoom to the callout view. 318 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . drag it to the sheet. under Sheets (all). for Line Weight. double-click M601 . select Callout of Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan.Modify callout boundary line weight 9 Press Esc to clear the selection. and click in the empty space at the top center to place it. change the line weight for the Callout Leader Line to 5.

for View Name. Ductwork in coarse detail Ductwork in fine detail Create a detail callout 18 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. enter Callout of Level 1 HVAC WSHP TYP. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. and click Apply Default View Template. select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation. The detail callout head has been updated with sheet information. For Title on Sheet. enter WSHP PART PLAN.15 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 17 In the Project Browser. For Default View Template. Click OK. The display of the ductwork changes from coarse detail to fine. right-click the callout view. Creating Callout Views | 319 .

20 Double-click the section head at the left of the stairs to open Room 53 Duct Section. 320 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 23 Draw the callout boundary around the level 1 ductwork as shown. and select Detail from the Type Selector drop-down.19 Zoom in to the area near the stairs in the lower-left corner space. 21 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout. 22 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel.

under Names. and click OK. 29 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating Callout Views | 321 . 26 In the Rename View dialog.24 Double-click the callout head to open the detail view. and click OK. 25 In the Project Browser. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and click Rename. select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation. and click Apply View Template. 27 Right-click Typical WSHP Detail. right-click the detail view.Design ➤ Detail Views (Detail). enter Typical WSHP Detail. 28 In the Apply View Template dialog. The view is changed to a hidden line display and is moved to its new position in the Project Browser hierarchy.

322 .

linetypes. duct tags. double-click Level 2 HVAC Duct Plan to make it the active view. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you work with tag and leader types to create an annotated HVAC documentation plan. Creating Annotations In this exercise. and annotation to create a legend. 323 . Add a text note to an HVAC documentation plan 1 In the Project Browser. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_01_m. you learn how to: ■ ■ ■ add text notes. 2 Zoom in to the offices in the lower right corner of the building in Area C.rvt. as shown. under Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans. create permanent dimensions in a lighting plan so that you can control the location of specific fixtures.Working with Annotations and Dimensions 14 In this lesson. symbols. click Training Files. and diffuser tags to an HVAC documentation plan. work with model-based components.

4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. 5 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Center). and select 1. and enter RUN DUCT THROUGH OPEN WEB JOISTS. use the drag grips to modify the text box width and position it so that it doesn’t cross the ductwork or wall. 324 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 8 With the text still selected. 6 Click to start the text note in between 2 of the branch ducts serving the perimeter supply air grilles.5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down.3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 7 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing. 9 Press Esc twice.

13 Press Esc to clear the selection. 12 Use the leader end grips to drag the arrows to point to the 2 branch ducts. The information on each tag varies according to the category of element. and then click Right Straight. a return diffuser. as shown. verify that Leader is cleared. a segment of round duct. 11 Click Modify Text Notes tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Add Leader: Left Straight. 16 In the drawing area. Use the leader segment grips to create leader segments from the text box. Creating Annotations | 325 .Add leaders 10 Select the text box. Add diffuser and duct tags by category 14 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. select a supply diffuser. and a segment of rectangular duct. 15 On the Options Bar.

Tag remaining diffusers 18 Using the same method. 24 On the Options Bar. navigate to Annotations ➤ Duct. Place a loaded tag and modify its orientation In order to display additional information about an element. under Category. as shown. 23 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category.rfa and M_Flex Duct Tag Round. 21 In the Load Family dialog. 20 In the Tags dialog. 22 In the Tags dialog. verify that the Loaded Tag is M_Bottom Elevation Duct Tag. If necessary.rfa. you can annotate the element with a second tag type.17 Click Modify. select M_Bottom Elevation Duct Tag. click Load. move diffuser tags off the ductwork. Load tags from library 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel drop-down ➤ Loaded Tags. select the large horizontal segment of rectangular duct and the round duct. 25 In the drawing area. for Ducts. and click Open. clear Leader. tag the remaining diffusers in the area. and click OK. 326 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions .

26 On the Options Bar. 32 In the drawing area. and then press Esc. Place tags with leaders 28 In the Project Browser. Creating Annotations | 327 . 30 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 29 Zoom in to the piping near the stairs in the upper right corner of the building in Area A. open Documentation ➤ HVAC-Pipe ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan_A. select Horizontal. 27 Select the large segment of rectangular duct connected to the WSHP. and Attached End. 31 On the Options Bar. select the select the large pipe on the right as shown. specify Tag Orientation as Vertical. Leader.

34 In the drawing area. for Leader. 36 Press Esc twice. 328 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . as shown. select Free End. then click to the right to place the leader as shown. 35 Click above and to the right of the leader start point.33 On the Options Bar. click the top horizontal pipe in the corridor.

Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 2 Zoom in to the left side of the plan. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_02_m. 38 Click Modify Pipe Tags tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. Creating Dimensions In this exercise. not simply an instance property. 40 Using the method learned previously. indicating that it’s the active view. for Leader Arrowhead. and click OK. and the tags placed previously have changed to the new style as well. 4 Using the Move Witness Line control. drag the witness line on the right to the face of the wall on the left side of the selected lighting fixture. lay out. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 39 In the Type Properties dialog. 37 In the drawing area. select the last tag placed. select Arrow Filled 15 Degree.Edit a tag type You edit the type properties for the pipe size tag so that you can specify a different leader style. click Training Files. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan_A is highlighted. 3 Select the upper left lighting fixture. and lock lighting fixtures.rvt. That’s because you changed a type property. Lay out lighting fixtures using temporary and permanent dimensions 1 In the Project Browser. and all elements of that type are affected. you use temporary dimensions to locate. tag the bottom horizontal pipe as shown. Notice that the new tags you place use the new style. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating Dimensions | 329 .

select the dimension line. 11 Click in any empty space in the drawing area to finish. add dimension strings for the remaining 2 rows of lighting fixtures in the room.5 Click to create a permanent dimension. 9 Select the reference line at the center of the next fixture to the right. notice that Prefer : Wall faces is selected. 10 Repeat for the remaining 2 top fixtures. On the Options Bar. 330 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . and then select the interior face of the wall. You can modify the preferred condition for dimension face selection. 14 Using the same method. 6 Press Esc to clear the selection. 8 Click Modify Dimensions tab ➤ Witness Lines panel ➤ Edit Witness Lines. 12 Click EQ. 13 Press Esc. Continue the dimension string using the Edit Witness Lines feature 7 In the drawing area.

16 To lock the dimensions between the interior fixtures. Creating a Legend | 331 . the fixtures shift to maintain constraints. and offset them from the wall. lock the dimensions of the interior fixtures for the remaining 2 rows. enter 2430.Lock dimensions between fixtures 15 Select the center dimension line. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 21 Close the file with or without saving it. and press Enter. click Training Files. Creating a Legend In this exercise. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_03_m. linework.9). click the 3 interior locks on the line. annotation symbols. 20 Using the same methods. Modify dimensions to offset fixtures 18 Select the right lighting fixture in the center line.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 19 Select the dimension value (3376. you create an HVAC Sheet Metal legend using model-based legend components. 17 Press Esc. Because the dimensions are locked. and notes.

select Air Terminals : M_Supply Diffuser . 8 On the Options Bar: ■ For Family.Rectangular Face Round Neck : 600x600 . Click OK.200 Neck. 6 Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 5 Click in the drawing area. Create a legend title 3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. select 1 : 50. 2 In the New Legend View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. and enter DIFFUSER LEGEND. place: ■ ■ ■ Air Terminals : Return Diffuser : 600 x 600 Face 300 x 300 Connection Air Terminals : Exhaust Grill : 600 x 600 Face 300 x 300 Connection Air Terminals : Supply Diffuser . Add model element detail components 7 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Legend Component. 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. enter Diffuser Legend. For Scale. 10 Using the same method.Create a legend view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Legends drop-down ➤ Legend. For View.5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. select Floor Plan. click below the title to place the diffuser.Sidewall : 450 x 200 332 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . ■ 9 In the drawing area. and select 1.

and select 1. and enter SUPPLY DIFFUSER. click next to the top diffuser. Add detail component text descriptions 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. annotate the remaining components: ■ ■ ■ RETURN DIFFUSER EXHAUST GRILL SIDEWALL SUPPLY DIFFUSER 16 Click Modify. 14 In the drawing area. Creating a Legend | 333 . 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. 15 Using the same method and using the blue dashed reference lines for alignment.11 Press Esc.5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down list.

select Thin Lines from the Line Style drop-down. open HVAC_SM_DUCT_CONDITION legend view. 334 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . and then click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE .DROP symbol to specify the copy end point.Create a legend symbol 17 In the Project Browser.RISE symbol for the copy start point. The selected detail lines are now thin. 19 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 24 Select the component’s break line. 22 Zoom in to the copied component. 26 Press Esc. 25 Select the center reference line as the mirror line. 18 Select the ELEVATION INCLINE .DROP and its text note. select the top and bottom detail lines on the left side of the component. and then press Esc. 20 Click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE . and click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Mirror. 21 Press Esc. 23 Delete the arrow and the left 3 lines at the center of the component. 27 While pressing Ctrl. 28 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel. 29 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Symbol.

38 Drag Diffuser Legend from the Project Browser to the bottom of the sheet. 35 Change the text on the right to N.MECHANICAL LEGEND. and then click Modify. 33 Click to the left of the left break line. 32 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. mirror the text on the center reference line of the component. in the Ductwork-Sheet Metal column. 31 Click below the center of the bottom component to place the symbol. 36 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing.Target Filled from the Type Selector drop-down. Place legend views on a sheet 37 In the Project Browser. enter E. and then click Modify.30 Select Spot Elevation . 34 Using the method learned previously. Creating a Legend | 335 . and then change the text note to CONNECT NEW DUCT TO EXISTING DUCT. double-click Sheets (all) ➤ M100 .

No Title from the Type Selector drop-down. click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel.39 With the viewport still selected. 336 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . and select Title w Line . 41 Close the file with or without saving it. 40 Press Esc.

detail groups. A 3D isometric detail view of a typical WSHP Make Up detail. and text. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_01_m. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. A drafting view using detail components. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Power Plan ➤ Level 1 Power Plan_B is highlighted. 2 Double-click the right elevation head to open the Power Riser . 337 .113 East elevation view. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail In this exercise. Tag electrical panels 1 In the Project Browser. A drafting detail by importing a CAD detail.rvt. you place elevation views on a sheet and then arrange them as a single view in preparation of creating a one-line diagram. you will create: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A model-based detail of an electrical power riser diagram. indicating that it’s the active view. A detail callout that references another view.Detailing 15 In this lesson.

338 | Chapter 15 Detailing . and click to place it. 8 Using the same method.113 North elevation view from the Project Browser to the empty area at the upper left of sheet E101. place Power Riser . 5 In the drawing area.Electrical Power Riser Diagram to make it the active view. double-click Sheets (all) ➤ E101 . 4 On the Options Bar.113 East on the sheet. and then modify and align the views. you place both the North and East elevation views on a sheet. Next.3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. Notice that the software displays a dashed line so that you can align the views as you place them. select each of the 2 panelboards. 7 Drag the Power Riser . Place views on a sheet 6 In the Project Browser. clear Leader. Place the view close to the left edge of the sheet so that there is room in the same space for the east elevation view.

Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail | 339 . giving the appearance of a single view. Modify a viewport title 14 Select the title of the 113 North view. Doing this enables you to later drag the 113 East view to the left. and use the filled circle drag control on the right to drag the end of the level line to the right. and click OK. for Title on Sheet. and click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 12 Select the Level 1 line. 13 Right-click. select the 113 North view. and click Activate View. Modify level lines 11 In the drawing area. enter Electrical Power Riser Diagram. under Identity Data. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog.9 Press Esc. 10 Zoom to the power riser elevations on the sheet. and click Deactivate View. right-click.

right-click. and click Activate View. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements.Remove a viewport title display 16 Select the 113 East view. 340 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 23 Close the file with or without saving it. right-click. you add wiring to the diagram. Align elevation views to resemble a single view 18 In the drawing area. 17 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. 21 Using the drag control. move the view to the left so that it overlaps the 113 North view. In the next exercise.No Title from the Type Selector drop-down. You combine views in order to create a one-line diagram. and select Title w Line . 22 Press Esc. 20 Select the 113 East elevation view again. as shown. 19 Select the Level 1 line. select the 113 East elevation view.

Creating Detail Wiring In this exercise. notice that there are no snaps active. In the Line Styles dialog. 9 Beginning at the transformer. enter Electrical Power. Creating Detail Wiring | 341 . 2 Close the Project Browser. expand Lines. 4 In the Line Styles dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. 8 On the Options Bar. verify that Chain is selected. you use detail lines to create wiring for the one-line electrical riser diagram. and click OK. indicating that it’s the active view. verify that Sheets (all) ➤ E101 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. Draw linework to create a wiring diagram 5 In the drawing area. zoom in to the service transformer (T-SVC) located at the bottom left of the Power Riser . This maximizes the drawing window so that you can more easily add wiring to the riser diagram. click Training Files. as shown. and then click OK. You also create a detail group and annotate the diagram. Under Modify Subcategories. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. for Name. Zoom in as necessary and use the drag controls to make sure the lines clean up properly.113 North view. and select Electrical Power from the Type Selector drop-down. Create a linetype 1 In the Project Browser. 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line.Electrical Power Riser Diagram is highlighted. 3 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Line Styles. 7 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Element panel. click New. for Line Weight. As you draw. draw lines to represent the wiring to the switchboard (SWB). select 6.rvt. In the New Subcategory dialog. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_02_m.

add lines to represent wiring between the switchboard and a panel on level 3 (MDP_3). for Offset. 13 On the Options Bar. 342 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 11 Using the same method. 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset. as shown. enter 3mm.10 Press Esc. 14 Click to place lines offset to the right and above the first 2 lines from the switchboard.

15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 18 Select the vertical detail line that connects into MDP_2 as the first line to trim. so that the result is as shown. 17 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. 19 Select the horizontal line to the right of the first line. Creating Detail Wiring | 343 . TIP When you use the Trim tool. you select the portion of the line that you want to keep. 16 Draw a line to connect the offset line to MDP_2.

344 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 23 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Start-End-Radius Arc). Add a break symbol and note You create the break symbol and text note once. 24 Draw a “cap” (the break symbol) over the 3 vertical lines at the top of the panel. as shown. 22 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line.20 Continue adding detail lines until the diagram is wired as shown. and then copy them to multiple locations in the diagram. The name of the detail arc (Start-End-Radius) indicates the order in which you select the defining points of the arc. 21 Zoom in to panel MP-1B.

select Multiple. 34 Click the endpoint of the left vertical line under the break symbol as the copy start point. 27 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. select the text and the detail arc of the break symbol. 32 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. and use the drag controls to resize the text box and position it as shown. 33 On the Options Bar.5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. 31 While pressing Ctrl. and then click Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: (Center). and select 1.25 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 26 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ No Leader. 28 Click above the cap. and type SEE MECHANICAL CONNECTION SCHEDULE. Copy the symbol and text 30 Select the text. 29 Click Modify. Creating Detail Wiring | 345 .

36 Press Esc. 346 | Chapter 15 Detailing .35 Click the endpoint of each of the corresponding lines for the other 2 mechanical panels (MP-2B and MP-3B) as the copy endpoints.

click to specify the start point of the first horizontal line. 41 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset. 40 Press Esc. and press Enter. enter 12. 43 Click twice to place 2 more lines below the first line. Press Esc.0. and then press Esc. 38 Beginning below the level 1 switchboard. you can ensure that they stay together. You enter exact values for each line length. change the length of the bottom line to 3. 37 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. and press Enter. enter 3. enter 7. You can also specify the origin point of the group so that it is placed accurately.Create a ground wire You use 3 detail lines to create a ground wire symbol. for Offset. click on the length dimension value. 39 Move the cursor to the right. 44 Edit the offset lines: ■ ■ ■ Select the middle line. 42 On the Options Bar. Using the same method. Creating Detail Wiring | 347 . Create a detail group By grouping the lines that represent the ground wire.

51 Using the method learned previously. 48 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group. TP-2B. and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. expand Groups ➤ Detail. 47 In the drawing area. 49 In the Create Detail Group dialog. 55 Click below each of the transformers (TP-1B. enter Ground. 56 Draw a detail line to connect each ground wire group to its transformer. and then click the endpoint of the detail line as the move end point. 46 In the Project Browser. select all 3 lines. 348 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 52 Select the detail group. for Name. 54 Select the group. draw a detail line that extends from the bottom right of the switchboard. and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. and TP-3B) to place the ground wire group in those locations. and then press Esc. drag the Modify Group Origin control to the midpoint of the top detail line. 50 With the group selected.45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down ➤ Project Browser to open the browser view. and click OK. while pressing Ctrl. 53 Click the origin of the detail group as the move start point.

In later exercises. and will place it on sheet E01. 59 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 349 . select the entire Electrical Riser Power Diagram viewport. you will create the Mechanical Connection Schedule referenced here.Pin wires and view You pin the view and all detail lines so that they don’t get moved accidentally. You use a view template to isolate the mechanical components so that you can annotate the detail components. you duplicate an existing view and orient it to a section view in order to create an isometric detail view. 58 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail In this exercise. 57 Using a crossing window (beginning at lower left and extending to upper right).

and Left sides converge. 6 In the Rename View dialog. Apply a view template 9 In the Project Browser. and click Apply View Template.Duct ➤ Sections (Building Section). 4 In the Project Browser. and double click Typical Make Up Air. Walkthroughs. 3 Select the section box.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Back. and click Rename. Prepare the view 1 In the Project Browser. right-click Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. expand Documentation ➤ HVAC . enter Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. 7 Right-click the ViewCube. for Name. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_03_m. click Training Files. and click OK. 2 Zoom in to view the section. 8 On the ViewCube. 350 | Chapter 15 Detailing . select 3D Views. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and then click the corner where the Top. 10 In the View Templates dialog: ■ For Show Type. and then press Esc. 5 Right-click the copy. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Duct & Equipment. and drag the top grip down so that the section includes only the first floor. click Home. and click Orient to View ➤ Sections ➤ Typical Make Up Air.

label the connecting duct 200x150 Makeup Air to Return Plenum (Provide Motorized Damper). click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: (Right). Enter Makeup Air Duct from AHU-1. Click OK. and drag the controls to resize the text box as shown. This isolates the mechanical components by turning off the architectural components. 16 Select the text for the 8x8 duct. and select 5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. and click to specify the second leader point. Annotate the view 11 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. Move the cursor down and to the left. Change text alignment 17 With the text still selected.■ ■ Under Names. 12 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. Typical. 14 Place the label: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click on the long rectangular duct to start the leader. 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 351 . Move the cursor to the left and click to specify the text insertion point. Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. select 3D HVAC Iso. 15 Using the same method.

select Crop View and clear Crop Region Visible. 352 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. and under Extents. as shown. and then click OK. and use the drag controls to position the boundaries around the detail. under Extents. as shown.18 Press Esc. 23 Click on the crop region. 19 Complete the text labels. type VP to open the instance properties for the view. To rotate and reposition a text label. select Crop Region Visible. select the label and use the Drag and Rotate controls that display. 24 Access the instance properties for the view. 22 Zoom out so that the isometric detail and the crop region are both visible. Modify the view 20 In the drawing area.

select Crop View and Section Box. Drafting Detail Components | 353 . click Training Files. and position the elements as shown 31 Right-click the view. Use detail lines to create a detail group. Place a detail component. Work with a filled region that represents a detail component. Annotate the drafting view using keynotes and text notes. 30 On the View Control Bar.rvt.25 Click OK. and click Deactivate View. 32 In the Instance Properties. specify 1 : 2 for the scale. 28 Drag the new isometric view from the Project Browser onto the sheet. Place the view on a sheet 27 In the Project Browser. clear Crop Region Visible. Drafting Detail Components In this exercise. and click View Properties. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_04_m. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 26 Zoom to the drawing extents. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. open Sheets (all) ➤ M601-HVAC DUCT PLAN & SECTIONS. scroll down. and click OK. 33 Right-click the view. 34 Close the file with or without saving it. and under Extents. and click Activate View. you: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drafting view. 29 Right click the view.

7 Click in the middle of the drawing area to place the component. For Scale. 6 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Element panel. select Documentation. 3 In the Project Browser. as the rectangle start point. 13 In the drawing area. For View Classification. Notice the new location of the view in the Project Browser. and select M_Floor Drain with Waterproofing-Section from the Type Selector drop-down. Click OK. 8 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Place a floor drain detail component 5 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component. select Plumbing. select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down. enter Typical Floor Drain Detail. select 1 : 5. you can more accurately locate the view in the Project Browser hierarchy. The new view is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). 11 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Rectangle). right-click the view name. click the point at the top of the drain. Click OK. and click Properties. as shown. for Sub-Discipline. 4 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. 354 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 12 On the Element panel. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name.Create a drafting view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Drafting View. Use a filled region to create a concrete slab 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Region drop-down ➤ Region. By defining a Sub-Discipline and a View Classification. 9 Zoom in to the component.

click the bottom left corner of the filled region to specify the group insertion point.5 NR 18 from the Type Selector drop-down. and click OK. 21 In the drawing area. and then press Esc.P. click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Arrange ➤ Send to Back drop-down ➤ Send to Back. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog. 22 Click Modify. Concrete.I. 18 With the filled region still selected. Drafting Detail Components | 355 .14 Drag the cursor down and to the left so that the rectangle is 500 x 140. 17 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Region panel ➤ Finish Region. Add a structural metal deck detail group 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Group drop-down ➤ Place Detail Group. 20 Select 1. select C. for Type. 15 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Region Properties.

23 In the drawing area.Modify the boundary of the filled region You edit the boundary of the concrete slab so that it matches the contour of the metal deck. press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. 34 Press Esc. click to select the indicated points in succession from left to right to define the new boundary. and then click point 6 as the endpoint. 33 Click the endpoint of the copied chain as the start point for the next chain. 29 Highlight one of the lines you just drew. 31 On the Options Bar. 27 Using the following illustration as a guide. select Multiple. 356 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 30 Click Edit Boundary tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 28 Click Modify. select the filled region. 32 Click point 1 to specify it as the start point. 25 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ 26 Zoom to the lower left corner of the filled region. (Line). and then click to select them. 24 Click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Edit Boundary.

35 Draw a line from the end of the last copied boundary line down to the base of the slab. 39 Select the line between points 1 and 2. and then press Esc. 36 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. The boundary of the slab now matches the contour of the metal deck. 37 Select the small vertical line you just drew. and then select the side of the slab above the line. 38 Pan to the other end of the slab. Drafting Detail Components | 357 . 41 Type ZF to zoom out. and then select the base of the slab to the right of the line. 40 Click Finish Region.

select the Flashing Membrane group. 51 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group. 358 | Chapter 15 Detailing . (Rectangle). 48 Using the existing thin line as a guide.. press Tab to highlight the chain. and click OK. 44 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ This represents the vinyl composition flooring. for Name. 49 Click Modify. Modify the group origin point 53 In the drawing area. 52 In the Create Group dialog. 50 Highlight one of the wide lines.D. draw a rectangle on top of the filled region. Notice that the origin point of the group is at the center. enter Flashing Membrane_F. 47 Select Wide Lines from the Line Style drop-down. and then click to select them. draw wide detail lines as shown. Create a detail group 46 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 45 Using the method learned previously. as shown.Create a floor component 42 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 43 Select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down.

as shown. Drafting Detail Components | 359 . 59 Press Spacebar 3 times to orient the component correctly. press Spacebar twice. 60 Click the midpoint of the drain to specify the breakline location. 57 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component.54 Drag the origin point so that it snaps to the right endpoint of the detail lines. as shown. and add a breakline at the midpoint of the slab’s left edge. 55 Press Esc. 61 Using the same method. Add breaklines 56 Type ZO to zoom out. 58 Select M_Break Line from the Type Selector drop-down.

as shown. Modify breakline boundaries 63 Select the left breakline. 67 On the Options Bar. 64 Press Esc twice. and use the grips to resize the masking region. select Leader and Free End. 360 | Chapter 15 Detailing .62 Press Esc twice. 66 Select Keynote Text from the Type Selector drop-down. 65 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Keynote drop-down ➤ User. Add a keynote You begin annotating the detail components by adding a keynote for the floor drain object. 69 Click twice to place the leader as shown. 68 Select the top of the drain as the object to tag.

select the keynote and drag the text to the right. Add text notes You add text notes to continue annotating the view. 77 Move the cursor up and to the left. select 15000 (Division 15 . and then click anywhere in the view to finish editing. 78 Move the cursor to the left. and then click OK. 80 Press Esc twice. and click to specify the second leader point. Drafting Detail Components | 361 . and use the drag controls to resize and move the text box as shown. 71 Click Modify. 81 Select the text note. click in the area indicated by the left arrow in the following image. 76 To select the leader start point.70 In the Keynotes dialog. 79 Enter Adjustable Nickel Bronze Strainer with 100mm Flange. and click to specify the text insertion point. 72 If necessary. 73 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 75 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Right). 74 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments.A2 Floor Drain W/O Waterproofing.Mechanical) ➤ 15100 ➤ 15150 ➤ 15150.

as shown. Add dimensions You add a dimension with multiple references. 84 Using the following image as a guide. click to select the slab lines in the order indicated. 362 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 83 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned.82 Continue annotating the detail.

90 Press Esc.Plumbing Part Plans & Details. 87 Drag Typical Floor Drain Detail from the Project Browser to the top center of the sheet. and then press Esc twice. open P103 . 88 In the drawing area.85 Click to the left of the slab to place the dimension line. 91 Close the file with or without saving it. Drafting Detail Components | 363 . Place the detail on a sheet 86 In the Project Browser. select the view title. and click to place it. 89 Select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down.

364 .

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful